JP6674425B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides a game control program storing means for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means for performing a predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a light emitting section based on the driving data output by the arithmetic processing means. And a driving means for driving.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game control program storage means for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means for performing a predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a driving data output by the arithmetic processing means. A game control device including a driver (driving means) for driving a light emitting unit (display device) based on the game device (see Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine, a main process for starting up the game control device is performed when the power is turned on. At this time, the driver is initialized.

JP 2017-77362 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the light emitting unit cannot normally display due to the influence of noise or the like, it cannot be returned to normal.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to return a game machine to a normal state even when the light emitting section cannot be displayed normally due to the influence of noise or the like.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a game control program storage means for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means for performing a predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and driving data output by the arithmetic processing means And a driving unit for driving a light emitting unit based on the game device, wherein the driving unit is provided with a setting unit for setting a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit, and the game control program controls a progress of a game. And an interrupt process executed by interrupting the main process at predetermined time intervals. The arithmetic processing unit drives the initial setting data for initial setting the setting unit in the interrupt process. after sending to the means, transmits the driving data to the driving means, the initial setting data sets the light emission intensity of the light emitting portion du Includes the duty ratio information, and a number of digits of information for setting the driving number of digits of the light emitting portion.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, even when the light emitting unit cannot normally display due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to return to normal.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure showing the composition of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure showing the composition of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability set value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure suspension information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure change display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure change display game for each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an ordinary process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (the 1). FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display example (2) of the collective display device during the change of the probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (the 4). FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display example (5) of the collective display device during the change of the probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during a probability setting change (6). It is a figure showing other examples of composition of a collective display. It is a figure showing another composition of a collective display. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a look-ahead symbol system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch fluctuation | variation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit command process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop design mode in the chance eye look-ahead production concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol style concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 1) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 2) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. It is a front view when the board production device of the game board concerning a 3rd embodiment operates. It is a front view when the frame effect device of the glass frame according to the third embodiment operates. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable object control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a timing of an initial operation control process according to a third embodiment. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a timing of an initial operation control process according to a comparative example of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception concerning 4th Embodiment. It is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fanfare effect setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of a setting suggestion effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the ending effect setting processing concerning the modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of out-of-ball number reception concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of count information setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display at the time of a big hit in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure in the 4th Embodiment which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a display device when a hall setting mode is set in a fourth embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a display device when in a player setting mode in a fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of the display device in a time series, and is an example of a screen transition of the entire game when the suspension display during the change of the special figure of the suspension digestion area changes. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series, and is an example of a screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in an effect display area. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, another example of screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the reserved digestion area or the effect display area It is. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the LED driver concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the character code (character code) which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and the lighting pattern of the character corresponding to it. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an initialization command and a latch transmitted to an LED driver according to a sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED driver initial setting processing concerning a 6th embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an LED command transmitted to an LED driver and a latch according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing the details of the cascade connection of the LED driver concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. FIG. 78A is a diagram illustrating details of a state display device according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 78A is a diagram illustrating details of an accessory ratio display unit that configures the state display device and displays an accessory ratio. FIG. 78 (B) is a view showing details of a discharged ball number display section for displaying the discharged ball number and a payout rate display section for displaying the payout rate, which constitute the state display device. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for a winning combination and the driver for the payout rate / discharged ball count according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initial setting processing of the driver for the winning combination and the driver for the payout rate / discharged ball count concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for a duty ratio which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for the payout rate / discharged ball count. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the example of composition of the game control system of the game machine concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing the details of the cascade connection of the LED driver concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for lump sum, the driver for winning combination, and the driver for the payout ratio / discharged ball count according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for lump sum, the driver for a winning combination, and the driver for the payout ratio / discharged ball count according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for lump sum, the driver for winning combination, and the driver for the payout ratio / number of discharged balls according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame which is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and the like. Can be.

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18a and 18b each contain an illumination member such as an LED therein, and emit light according to a game state. The illumination members provided inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is provided at each of the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15. Apart from the upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (toward the player) is provided. The protruding effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is interposed in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and if the variable display game is simply referred to as a variable figure display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device during the non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. The special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is highly likely to occur in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), or a big hit state (special game state). ), A small hitting game state (small hitting state).

  Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Further, whether or not to generate a probability change state may not necessarily be determined by the big hit symbol random number, but may be made to always generate a probability change state when a big hit occurs. A probable change state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a lighting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 having the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower right speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The shooting speed of the game ball fired from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball firing device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) at which game balls are fired into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and play the game in various firing modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing modes include left-handed (normal hit) in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

(Game board)
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of a gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, but may be a device having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a character that creates a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a into a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are transferred to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure change display game is provided, and immediately below the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening) (second start winning area). A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning region) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the state in which the game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, game balls cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general-purpose change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor variation display game higher than normal, By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, the time saving state (general power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that, also in the probable change state (except the latent probable change state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an attacker type in which the large winning opening is opened by turning the upper end side to the front side by the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. The special fluctuation winning device 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and obtains the special winning state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. In addition, one or a plurality of large winning port LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) that illuminate the large winning port are arranged in and near the large winning port (around the large winning port) of the special variable winning device 39. .

  When a game ball wins a large winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of the winning opening. Are discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21 in accordance with the number of prize balls. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided.

  In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

  FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the batch display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure change for a change display game, which is configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), a variable display unit 53 for general-purpose variable display game (general-purpose display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variable display game It has a storage display unit (a special figure 1 reservation display 54, a special figure 2 reservation display 55, and a general figure reservation display 56) for reporting the number of storages. The special figure 1 hold display 54 includes lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold display 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose display 56 is constituted by lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, a lamp) for notifying that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-handed). D7), a second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. A third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9) for displaying the state, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variable winning device 39) are displayed. A round display section 60 (lamp D3-D6) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing a variable display. In addition, all of the LEDs provided as a display are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinking), cyclically turned on (turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one of the LEDs), or a plurality. The lighting may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the ordinary figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the general figure display 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for performing a variable display (flashing) in which a lighting display and a non-lighting display are repeated as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and starting of each special figure variable display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for informing the (reserved) storage number. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1 and special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED1, special figure 2 hold LED2) display the number of special figure 2 hold (second start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. I do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds when a big hit occurs. However, in a case other than the state of the big hit (including a case where a reach described later occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the player wins the normal fluctuation prize device 37 or the special fluctuation prize device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening that has been won is provided via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

  The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the winning prize ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, each change pattern random number, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) and the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) are identified by the identification information (the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the special symbols and special symbols. The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order (scroll display), the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuating display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, the fourth special symbol is repeatedly displayed (flashed) on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 as another decorative special symbol (identification information). fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at a predetermined time after the start, with "off" in the case of a loss, and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). In other words, the special winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 is widely opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, a privilege is given that a player can acquire many game balls. You.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state). Value (number of acquired balls) is small. In addition, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting a small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In this case, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure change display game, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (39a) ) Uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like includes a machine. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110 with the input section 120 and the output section 130. Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  The game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 that is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to change a setting value related to a game condition (game), according to an operation of the operator. And a setting value change switch 102 capable of changing a setting value relating to a game condition. In the present embodiment, the set value relating to the game condition (game) is the probability set value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions (such as the small hit probability and the probable change inrush rate) other than the big hit probability are also set according to the probability set value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition. In the present embodiment, a touch switch signal of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as a determination signal for determining a set value, but an operable determination button switch (an operation unit or an operation unit) is used. A signal from the confirmation button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

  The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are located at positions that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened (a position that cannot be accessed). Is done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100. However, the front frame 12 (main body frame) such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is open. Otherwise, it may be provided at a position that cannot be accessed.

  When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the operator operates the set value change switch 102 (set value change button). This makes it possible to change settings (set values) relating to game conditions such as a jackpot probability and a probability-change rush rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is a setting variable state in which setting (set value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and turns the setting key switch 93 to the ON position to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state in which the setting is being changed is set. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be a variable setting state

  In the present embodiment, the setting values relating to the game conditions are defined in six stages, and are set value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the setting most disadvantageous to the player, and the setting value 6 is the setting most advantageous to the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the setting value changing process, every time the operator operates the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button), the setting value (setting) is changed from setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting. Change and select as value 5 → set value 6 → set value 1 → set value 2 → ... The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Further, the set value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability set value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. Note that the probability set value display device 143 may change the display in direct linkage with the operation of the set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As described later, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure change display section 51 and / or the second special figure change display section 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50. Is also good.

  When a touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100 by the operator touching the operation handle 24, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the set value) is determined and the probability set value in the RWM (storage means) is determined. This is stored in the area, and the setting value change processing ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting is changed, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, the setting). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which:

  On the other hand, after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change the state from the OFF state to the ON state, the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure change display unit 51 and / or the second special figure change display unit 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50. . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by sound from a speaker.

  The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), and is initialized when the initialization switch is on when power is turned on (power is restored). A switch signal is generated, and processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed based on the switch signal. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) differs (expected value differs), a normal reach (N-reach) and a special 1-reach system (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a small jackpot for determining the small jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including an execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without various reach or reach), and the like. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, For example, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  An input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34 a of the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning port 36. The switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 are connected, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and low level. Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 which receives a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, and detects a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. A signal is input from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (body frame) and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

  The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and receives the setting microcomputer switch signal via the data bus 140. 111.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a not-shown test shooting device via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the third input port 124 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating an insufficient game ball before payout, and an overflow. First, an overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and an out ball detection switch signal from an out ball detection switch are taken and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not it is. In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing. An out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only a game ball passing through the out port 30b.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 outputs opening / closing data of a solenoid (a general-purpose solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

  The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143. In the present embodiment, the probability set value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), and the information of the set value (probability set value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). The value may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via the display.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal based on a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 are provided. Is provided.

  32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  The output unit 130 further includes a driver 150 that receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives the status display device 152. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of seven-segment displays (eight-segment displays including a point portion) (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a four-digit seven-segment display (eight-segment display including a point portion), and is capable of displaying the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls. In addition, the state display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the accessory ratio, the ball-out rate, and the number of ejected balls, but may be one that indirectly displays the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory ratio. Good. That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information on the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls.

  Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passing through the winning opening (the number of winning) and the game passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls which is the number of game balls fired from the ball launching device to the game area 32. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting (counting) the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special fluctuation winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. The number of ejected balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and only up to 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of ejected balls may be displayed by counting up from “00” to “99”.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (acquired number of balls / number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of award balls).

  In the present embodiment, each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100, the payout rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls from 0 to 100. That is, the number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). Each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. Thus, if the acquired ball count (total prize ball count) is displayed as it is on the state display device 152, the payout rate will be displayed.

  For example, the ratio of the bonuses may be determined as the big hit state in the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) obtained by winning the special winning opening (= the so-called continuous role ratio). It should be noted that the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening (= big winning opening ratio) among all the winning balls. Or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called common use ratio (total common use ratio) )).

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. A random number for use is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is hit or not.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has been hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  In the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls the large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, for example, to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until such condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2) (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state (probable change state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. The control is performed so that the opening time of the battery is substantially increased, so that the power transmission support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) except the latent probability change state, the time reduction state is duplicated and the general power support is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-reduction variation in which the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the general-purpose variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time reduction state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal-floating display game is hit and the normal-variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal-power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be longer than the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing one or more of the general fluctuating time, the general figure stop time, the number of general public opening times, the general public opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time reduction state, it is easier to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “A ****”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (the second input port 123) (A1006). Thus, signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, the glass frame opening detection switch 63, and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) can be read.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3). By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of the operation, the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. Or a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times) ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. A determination is made (A1010). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal.

  When the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 150 for driving the state display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

  Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). To darken each LED with power saving, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used on the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used by the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is "Y"), RAM 111c is normal and RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

  FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so that the probability set value area is excluded from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers, and a variable pattern random number area for storing variable pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a power failure inspection area 1, a power failure inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. Note that the clear area # 2 includes a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 such as the accessory ratio, and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152. Not.

  In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area, and the game control stack area. An unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also, the status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the lowermost part in FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state or during the setting change state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

  When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When a signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is open instead of the front frame 12, or whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Is also good. When the signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is turned on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed, and the setting is in a variable state. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1023 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1024 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1025). If the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is “N”), the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is on (the result of A1025 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of RAM initialization (RAM clear) in steps A1042 to A1045. In this case, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on when the setting key switch 93 is off, the setting value change switch 102 is turned on by the RAM initialization switch ( RAM clear switch). Note that there is actually no situation where the setting value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (the result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means for initializing data is provided.

  In addition, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N” or result of A1018 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is “N”), an abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to a process for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability set value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. By the RAM clear start address 1, the RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability set value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 is open (the result of A1027 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is turned on (result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting is in the variable setting state in which the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM initialization processing in the variable setting state in steps A1036-A1041 ( (RAM clearing process) and the process during the setting change. The RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization processing in this case is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1027 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1028 is "N"), a command of a setting change instruction for urging the player to change the setting is transmitted to effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the setting change instruction displays a setting change instruction display on the display device 41 that prompts the player to change the setting. According to the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on by the player to change the setting (result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality is eliminated by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. it can.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and waits until the power of the game machine is cut off.

  Next, the processing at the time of normal power-on (at the time of power restoration) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure in an area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Thereafter, the game control device 100 checks an area in the RWM in which the game state is stored to determine whether the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

  Here, when the gaming state is not the high-probability state (result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1033 and step A1034 and shifts to the processing of step A1035. If the gaming state is in the high probability state (result of A1032 is "Y"), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50. The ON (lighting) data of the (third game state display section 59, error display) is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and the process proceeds to step A1046. Move on to processing.

  Next, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the setting variable state and the processing during the setting change in steps A1036-A1041 will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). When the RAM 111c is normal (result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set. When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is set because the RAM clear start address 1 is set. That is, when the RAM is normal, the probability set value area is not cleared, but when the RAM is abnormal, the probability set value area is also cleared.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. It is possible to output what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability set value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, set value 1) may be saved in the probability set value area as an initial value.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability set value changing flag indicating that the setting is in a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038). Subsequently, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area as initial data when the probability set value is changed (A1039), the value of the probability set value area is loaded, and the probability set value is set. It is saved in the working probability set value area as initial data at the time of change (A1040). Subsequently, a command indicating that the setting is being changed (probability setting is being changed) indicating that the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. The effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting is in the variable setting state (probability setting is being changed) by the command whose probability setting is being changed.

  Next, the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042 to A1045 will be described.

  The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042), and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, the probability set value area is not cleared in the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by operating the RAM initialization switch (set value change switch 102).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure restoration transmitted in the processing of step A1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1045 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine, a hold of special figures 1 and 2, The command includes a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command indicating the number, a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, and a probability information command indicating the probability state. Also, depending on the state at the time of power-off or power-on, a restoration screen command if the special figure fluctuation display game is running at the time of power-off, and a customer waiting demo command if the customer is waiting at the time of power-off And a power-on command indicating that the power has been turned on. Further, it includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sounds of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the like and the sound of the speaker (RAM). Clear) is issued for 30 seconds.

  Furthermore, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information of a set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

  After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 sets a timer interrupt signal and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Activate (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the execution of the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random number for determining a big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number for determining small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number for determining hit of normal symbol (hit random number), random number for determining hit symbol of common symbol (hit symbol random number) Etc.) as an initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and permit an interrupt (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are in the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which the start value is changed using the initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1051), It is determined whether the signal is on (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update processing (A1050), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is initialized. By being made to wait by the value random number update processing, it is possible to prevent the interruption processing from being overwhelmed. During the setting change (during the setting variable state), the processing of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 relating to the update of the initial random number need not be executed.

  In addition to the initial random number updating process in step A1050, there is also a method of performing the initial random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, the initial random number updating process is performed in both of them. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, and only in the main processing, the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing. However, there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified thereby.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051. A determination is made (A1053). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is prohibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A1055).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control unit (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111c that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets a higher address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). Note that when a signal of prohibition of firing is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a signal of firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a random number update process 1 (A1305) and a random number update process 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Note that when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state), the random number update processing 1 and the random number update processing 2 need not be executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the monitoring of whether there is a normal signal input from the special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors (front frame, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing a process such as whether the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1307).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability set value change process for changing the probability set value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting change) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A1310). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that probability setting confirmation is being performed.

  When neither the probability setting is changed nor the probability setting is confirmed (result of A1310 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. Execute (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure change display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general view change display game is executed (A1313). When the probability setting is being changed (result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not need to transmit the payout command. Processing (A1311), special figure game processing (A1312), and ordinary figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of step A1314.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure changing game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegal monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, a magnet fraud flag is saved in a magnet fraud flag area. Further, a radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the gaming board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, a vehicular radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the vehicular radio wave fraud flag area.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output processing, the ratio of the accessory, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated as output data to the state display device 152. In the status display editing output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated, and if the checksum does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and the status display The stack area may be cleared. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank specification are automatically performed. However, depending on the CPU used, the interruption is permitted after the external information editing processing. May be performed, or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the output process.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further combines the combined data with the output data of the firing permission (A1610), and finally combines the data. The data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (A1611).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data of the probability set value display (A1612). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period in which the probability set value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability set value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability set value is set (A1613). The probability set value display permission flag is set in a probability set value changing process described later.

  When the probability set value display permission flag is set (result of A1613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the probability set value display data from the probability set value display data area (A1614) and loads the data. The probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). If the probability set value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is “N”), the probability set value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is set to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141). (A1615). Therefore, when the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143. When the probability set value display permission flag is not set, the probability set value display device 143 is displayed. Turns off (blank display).

  Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and combines the data with the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output processing ends.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1621). Here, the display data itself of the probability set value display device 143 (seven-segment display), that is, the probability set value display data of the probability set value display data area, is output as the test signal output data relating to the probability set value. Note that the test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing a set value, or may be other forms of output data. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch-on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1622 is "N"), the test signal output data of the probability set value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (A1624).

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A2001). When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A2002). When the probability setting is not being confirmed (result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring processing from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be manually inserted into any of the winning openings, and it is meaningless to perform the monitoring process or the like, the monitoring process or the like from steps A2003 to A2010 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A2011. I do.

  When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 wins one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39). The mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2004).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the two winning opening switches 39a in the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39) (A2005). Then, a fraud & win monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2006).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the start-up 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2007). Then, a fraud and win monitoring process for monitoring a fraud and detecting a normal win is executed (A2008). Subsequently, a winning port monitoring table of a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch (SW) 35a of the general winning port 35.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range from 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2013). The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later.

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 is monitored, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shot ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the abnormal dispensing status signal (discharge abnormal error). Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2015).

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on a signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (fraud frame fraud) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2016 is "N"), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017) to determine whether an error has occurred. The game machine state check processing for determining the state of the game machine is executed (A2018).

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of a disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control (A2019). ), Finish the winning port switch / state monitoring process.

  Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings and the number of obtained balls (sum of the number of winning prizes) for each of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) and the normal variable winning device 37 are counted and stored. Further, information on the number of winning prizes and the number of obtained balls by role may be set as a production command. In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of balls obtained for each property (total of the number of winning prizes) relating to the starting winning port 36 and the general winning port 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a production command. Also, in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of ejected balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information on the number of out balls is provided as a production command (out ball number command). May be set as The throwout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls (the number of obtained balls for each role) to the number of ejected balls. The role item ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained by each role) obtained by winning the big winning opening out of the total number of prize balls (= so-called continuous role ratio). is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the output ratio to the state display device 152 may calculate the ratio of the accessory, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the gaming machine state check processing. The gaming machine state check processing is executed in steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning port switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. Note that the relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is obtained. And prepare (A2204). Further, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2205). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-related signal, and indicates a state of no touch for a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state-on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state-on command, and prepares. (A2207). Further, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the processing in step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1 and sets the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the status-on command is an error-related command, the effect control device 300 starts error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value changing process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability set value changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value is being changed (during a variable setting state) (A2401). If the probability set value is not being changed (result of A2401 is “N”), a probability set value confirmation process for confirming the probability set value is executed (A2402).

  When the probability set value is being changed (result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2403), and sets the probability set value extinguishing timer to 0. It is determined whether or not (A2404). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2406. If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (result of A2404 is “N”), nothing is performed, and the process proceeds to step A2406.

  Then, in step A2406, game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability set value changed flag described later is set, the probability set value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2416 to A2421 for terminating the setting change is executed.

  When the probability set value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A2411.

  When there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the value of the work probability set value area by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). Thus, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the work probability set value area is increased by one. When the set value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability set value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability set value area may return to 0. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability set value area correspond to the probability set values 1 to 6 in six stages. Note that the probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a light-off period (blank period) in which the probability set value display device 143 turns off (blank display).

  In this way, when the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability set value display permission flag, the probability set value display data is set as the probability set value during the setting change (work probability set value). When the probability set value extinguishing timer is displayed on the set value display device 143 and is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the probability set value extinguishing timer and the light is turned off only for a predetermined light extinguishing period, even when the setting has only one stage (when the setting value is only 1), It can be visually recognized on the probability set value display device 143 that the set value change switch 102 has been operated.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a touch switch signal is input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (result of A2411 is “N”), the probability set value changing process ends. When the touch switch signal is input (result of A2411 is “Y”), the value of the work probability set value area is loaded and saved in the probability set value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a determination signal for determining the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set values are stored in the probability set value area.

  Note that a configuration is also possible in which the probability set value is determined and stored in the probability set value area when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 93 was turned off or the setting was changed to a variable state. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. . That is, instead of the operation of the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143. Then, a probability set value changed flag indicating that the probability set value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command of the probability set value change indicating that the probability set value has been changed is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control). (A2415), and ends the probability set value changing process.

  In the process of ending the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability set value changing process ends. When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and excludes a probability setting value area and a random number area. Note that the clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to zero, information and flags used for setting change, such as information on the work probability set value area, a flag during the change of the probability set value, and a flag indicating that the probability set value has been changed, are cleared. You.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change has been completed, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and an external device (a hole) that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Computer, etc.). After that, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability set value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 and maintained.

  Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and returns to the main process (FIG. 5B). The process moves to the process of step A1049. The commands transmitted here include the above-described model designation command, decorative special figure 1 hold number command, decorative special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and completion of the probability setting change. Command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the change of the probability setting displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies the initialization of the RAM (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 and the like. Perform for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability set value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability set value confirmation process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (a set value confirmable state) in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When a probability set value check mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the camera is in the probability set value check mode. If the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “Y”), the processing after step A2509 is executed.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if a variable display game is being executed or a big hit is in progress, it can be determined that a game is being played. When the game is being played (result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability set value confirmation processing is ended so as to disable the confirmation of the probability set value. When a game is not being played (result of A2503 is “N”), it is determined whether or not setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

  When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value check mode flag (A2505). Thus, when the probability setting value is not being changed (during the setting variable state) (result of A2401 is “N”), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirming mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed ( (Set value can be checked). Subsequently, a probability set value display permission flag is set (A2506). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value in a security signal control timer area so that a security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 has been opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). The command for which the probability set value is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation processing ends.

  When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value check mode (result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A2509). If the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability set value confirmation mode continues, and the probability set value confirmation probability set value confirmation processing ends.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2509 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value checking mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability set value confirmation mode ends. Then, in order to prevent the probability set value from being displayed on the probability set value display device 143, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command to end the probability set value confirmation indicating that the probability set value confirmation has been completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2512).

  In the above description, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). However, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on when the power is turned on (restored power), the setting is changed (setting change state), and the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch is turned on. If the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the RAM initialization switch is turned on, the RAM can be initialized (RAM cleared). If the initialization switch is off, the power supply may be turned on (recovery of power supply) in a normal state. Further, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start-up switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start-up switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the start-up winning opening 36 and the normal-variation-winning winning device 37 forming the second start-up winning opening, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and a special figure change display based on the winning is performed. At the stage before the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating −1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2619.

  If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing is set in the register (A2605). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure change display game, and sets the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. The special figure ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, sets information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. The processing during the figure change is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, The special figure display process is performed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, and to set information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (effect command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability) is set, A processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, set necessary information such as a small hit fanfare command (effect command) and a small hit fanfare time, and set a processing number “7” relating to the processing during the small hit fanfare. Then save it in the special map game processing number area. If the result of the special figure change display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “3” in Step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. A fanfare / interval processing for setting is performed (A2611). For example, in the processing of the fanfare / interval, necessary information such as a round command (production command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number relating to the special winning opening processing is set. "4" is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if it is the last round, A special winning opening process is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball process (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening processing, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as a rendering command is set, a processing number “5” relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. To save.

  If the game processing number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning port remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning port remaining ball processing, if it is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the last round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number “6” relating to the big hit end processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2614). For example, in the big hit end processing, necessary information such as a probability state after the big hit state is completed and a general power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state is set, and the probability state and the time saving state are set to the probability information command (production) Command), a processing number “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. The probability information command includes a probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the number of continuous games in the normal power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state (the number of times of time reduction fluctuation, the number of times of electricity support). Information is included.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing the small hit processing. (A2615). For example, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning prize is set, a processing number “8” related to the small hit middle processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). For example, in the small hitting middle processing, necessary information such as a small hitting remaining ball processing time is set, a processing number “9” relating to the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “9” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as a small hit ending time is set, a processing number “10” relating to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2618).

  When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then sets the special figure 1 display. A symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). After preparing a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), a symbol change control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring processing (A2601) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start-up switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning port 36 (A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being reduced (in the state of supporting the general electric power) (A2704).

  If the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time reduction (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, when it is during special figure time reduction (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2705). A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the winning prize port 36 does not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. If the player does not hit the ball right, the game ball does not pass through the normal starting gate 34. Therefore, in the power-generating support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-handed driving. In the case where the player has left-handed, the right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquiring process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning port. A determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary power is occurring (A2713). If the number of unauthorized winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations (for example, five), it is determined that unauthorized unauthorized access is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or injustice has occurred. In the case where such a game ball wins in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714). Then, the special figure start port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. In addition, in A2713, when it is determined that a normal power fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs information on the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (the number of start storages) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target opening opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. It is saved in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes a special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A2918) is executed to execute the special figure start port switch common. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (A2916) in the start port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination process. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead (prior determination) processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (result of A3001 is “N”), the process shifts to a process of step A3004. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during the time reduction (general power support state) (A3002).

  When it is during the special figure time reduction (during the ordinary power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination processing. On the other hand, if it is not during the special figure time reduction (result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is being made (A3003). When a big hit or a small hit is in progress (result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the game is not in a big hit or a small hit (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit. Is executed (A3004). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is obtained (A3007), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) is won (A3008). If it is not a winning in the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  If the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (A3013), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. The information is acquired (A3012), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start-up switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed (A3016), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), Effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting processing in step A3017 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure ordinary processing. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) to form a preliminary judgment means. In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening processing is being performed (A3101). If the special winning opening is being processed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning game opening process is not being performed (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning game remaining ball is being processed. A determination is made (A3102).

  When the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a process of step A3105. If the special winning game remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting medium processing is being performed. (A3103). If the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A3105. When the small hitting process is not being performed (result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball process is being performed ( A3104). The special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, and thus the progress of the game can be checked based on the special figure game processing number.

  When the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the special winning opening switches 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (A3115). If the special winning opening ball is being processed (result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the special winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (result of A3115 is “N”), It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3117), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 "). ) Is determined (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3118 is “Y”), the winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the small hitting process is not being performed (the result of A3121 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 suspension number (second startup storage number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). When the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (A3209). Is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that it is in a customer waiting demonstration state (a state of a customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets "0" as a process number to a special map ordinary process (A3212). A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, if the customer waiting demonstration has already been started (result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special map ordinary processing is ended.

  As described above, the customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted when the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second startup storage number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs the setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demonstration command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is turned off.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number. The figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  As described above, the check of the number of special figure 2 reservations is performed before the check of the number of special figure 1 reservations, so that if the number of special figure 2 reservations is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the change symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is performed (A3402). The details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3406).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting information on a change start of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start processing. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 1 change display game, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 change symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game, and is the same processing as the processing in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. 18 except for the second start storage. Is what you do.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 2 and big hit information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared (A3505).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). Then, a variation start information setting process for setting information on the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 2 change display game, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601) and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (A3604). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the missed information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether or not the prepared big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this processing, the same processing as the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not a big hit is determined according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “N”), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to the probability set value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table defines an upper limit determination value according to the probability set value for each of the case of the high probability state and the case of the low probability state. Then, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A3808) and ends the big hit determination processing. I do.

  When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probable change state). (A3804). If the state is in the high probability state (result of A3804 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value during high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3805). On the other hand, when the state is not the high-probability state (result of A3804 is “N”), the upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set using the upper-limit determination value table in accordance with the probability setting value (A3806).

  When the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), an outlier (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the above-described big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure change display game becoming a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination. However, a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier as the judgment result (A3904), The determination processing ends.

  Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) becomes the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (A3903). If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), a loss is set as the judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “N”), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
FIGS. 24A, 24B, and 24C show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure change display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrated for each setting (each setting value).

  The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (becomes higher), and the larger the set value is, the more likely a big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The big hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the range of the lower limit judgment value or the value of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the set value. In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player has a pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, and 3 (the set values 1, 2, and 3) and the settings 4, 5, and 6 (the set values 4, 5, and 6) are the same. Is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), so that the player is not bored.

  In the example of FIG. 24C, the big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability are the same regardless of the setting (set value). In this case, the player estimates the setting (set value) from another setting determination element.

  Other setting discriminating factors include the probability change inrush rate (described later), the number of times that the general power support has been continued after the end of the big hit (described later), the number of times the probability change state has continued on the ST machine, the number of big hit rounds (the upper limit of the number of rounds) There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various times set in the special figure game process (stop display time, fanfare time, and the like). If the probabilities that predetermined contents of these setting discrimination elements are selected are made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting values from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3403) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) ) Is loaded with jackpot symbol random numbers (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing. In other words, the effect mode transition information allows the effect mode to be shifted upon a big hit. Also, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set in accordance with the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (probable variable big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol or the like), so the big hit symbol type (big hit type) and the big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode that transitions later changes. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state, and therefore, the effect mode transition destination is also affected by whether or not the current state is the special figure high probability state (probable change state).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (the result of A4011). Is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4011). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode shift information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted upon a small hit. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the loss stop symbol pattern is changed to the stop symbol pattern. It saves in the area (A4017), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A3503) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Example of special map jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-described special figure game processing for each setting.

  FIG. 27 illustrates, for each setting, a jackpot symbol table that defines the jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) indicating the types of jackpots and the distribution ratio thereof. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the big hit symbol numbers (big hit types, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value). This is advantageous. In addition, the probability-change entry rate is a ratio of the probability-change big hit symbol that the probability state after the big hit end becomes high probability to all the symbols. In addition, the number of times of the general power support after the end of the big hit, especially for a normal big hit (the probability state after the end of the big hit becomes a low probability) becomes larger as the set value becomes larger in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 growing. Setting 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are set to the same number of times of regular power support. In the ST machine, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of continuations of the probable change state increases as the set value increases.

  In FIG. 27, the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given in one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. Various configurations are also possible. Also, in FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game than to the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game has the special figure. This is more advantageous to the player than the one-variation display game.

  Note that, similarly to FIG. 24C, a configuration in which the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) is the same regardless of the setting (set value) is also possible.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The symbol that is changing can be determined from the changing symbol determination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). The effect control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is commonly set as the display time.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure displaying process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. (A4710). Further, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special figure game process, and a symbol variation control process in a general-purpose game process described later. The symbol change control process is to control the change of the special symbols (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and the ordinary symbols (ordinary figure) of the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and the special symbol and the normal symbol. This is a process for setting the display data of the symbol.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether the fluctuation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614). (For stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

  When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for display, display table 1) is defined on the change control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  If the updated flashing control timer is 0 (result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the variable flag for the symbol to be controlled is not varying (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7510), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control processing is ended.

  As the initial value of the blink control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. The initial value of the blink control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared for the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number reaches the upper limit value of the variable symbol number by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1). ) Are sequentially updated. In steps A7508 and A7511, a setting is made to acquire and display the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number, and update (change) the number of illumination patterns equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, a cycle of display is repeatedly performed.

  By defining the blink control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are repeated. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

  Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the game control device 100 A general-purpose game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the general-purpose game processing number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, and sets the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. A normal map ordinary process for setting information necessary for performing the normal diagram change process is executed (A7608). Details of the ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, when the game processing number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-floor change process for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display process ( A7609). For example, in the normal figure changing process, in order to shift to the normal figure displaying process, the game processing number is set to “2” and saved in the general figure game processing number area. Save in the processing timer area.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction state is set if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a hit. The general-figure display process is performed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general-floor process (A7610). For example, in the normal figure display processing, when the result of the general figure change display game is a hit, the game processing number is set to “3” and the general figure game processing number area On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the game processing number is set to “0” and saved in the general-figure game processing number area in order to shift to the normal-figure normal processing.

  When the game processing number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 performs continuation of the normal processing per ordinary map or setting of information necessary for performing ordinary electric remaining sphere processing. The middle processing per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal drawing per game process, the game process number is set to "4" after the setting for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times is performed, and then the process proceeds to the normal power remaining ball process. Save to the general game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “4” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general electric remaining sphere process for setting information necessary for performing a general map end process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal game remaining sphere processing, in order to shift to the general figure end processing, a game processing number is set to “5” and saved in the general figure game processing number area, and the general figure ending time is set to the general figure ending time. Save in the processing timer area.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-purpose hit end process for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose ordinary process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the per-chart end processing, the game processing number is set to “0” and saved in the per-chart game process number area in order to proceed to the perpetual map normal process.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a general-figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general-figure display 53 (A7614). Thereafter, a symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and thereafter.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the general-purpose game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A7702). The game state in which the player hits right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general power support state). If the game state is a right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of step A7705. If it is not the right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “N”), a left-turn instruction notification command (left-turn instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-turn instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) for instructing left-turn on the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved general-purpose drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved general-purpose drawings is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of ordinary drawing reservations by +1 (A7706) and corresponds to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations. The address of the hit random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A7608) in the ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the routine of the ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved ordinary figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM (for 1 reserved number), and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM is loaded. The winning symbol random number is loaded from (the number of holdings 1), and the loaded random number storage area per symbol (for holding number 1) and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary symbol (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7902). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than normal in the general-figure high probability state (in the high-probability state), that is, whether or not the time reduction state (general power support state). (A7903). In addition, the probability per figure in high probability is 250/251, and the probability per figure in low probability is 0/251.

  When the game is not in the probable high probability (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) that is the lower limit determination value in the probable low probability (A7904). If the figure is in the high figure high probability (the result of A7903 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in the figure figure high probability is set (A7905), and in step A7906 Move on to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or more than an upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of the general figure and the low probability of the general figure. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of the range, the flow shifts to the process of step A7908. If the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

  When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, when the hit is a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7908). Further, a lost stop symbol number is set as a normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), and the lost symbol information is saved in a normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the flow shifts to the process of step A7914.

  If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “N”), that is, if it is a winning, the gaming control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7911), The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the random number storage area per symbol. (A7916), after clearing the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (A7918).

  In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the general-family reservation number 1 are moved up by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and saves the fluctuation time in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the fluctuation time is distributed to 500 msec at a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec at a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec at a probability of 16/256. Then, a normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing is executed (A7921), and the normal-figure normal processing ends. For example, in the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, “1” is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing, and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area. Then, the flash control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) which is the initial value of the flash cycle timer of the general symbol display is saved in the general symbol flash control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) is set in the general symbol change symbol number area. Save.

  Further, when the number of reserved ordinary maps is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the ordinary daily diagram processing (A7922). Then, the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary processing in the ordinary figure is terminated.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1311), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), It performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If a body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and off data of the security signal is stored in the external information output data. It is saved in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”) or when the body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the door / door. The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). A determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or when the setting change is completed. (A1044 and A2419 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is measured from the time of initialization of the RAM or the time of completion of the setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated to change the setting (setting change mode) or the setting check state (setting check mode) ( A1037 and A2507 of the main processing), during the setting change (during the setting variable state) in which the probability setting value changing flag is set, and in the setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value checking mode flag is set, the security signal is output. You may make it output continuously. When the probability set value changing flag is set (A2414), not when the probability set value changing flag is cleared (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the output of the security signal is stopped. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and shifts to a process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet irregularity is not occurring (result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not panel radio irregularity is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that when the dish radio fraud flag is saved in the disc radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the dish radio is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the general fraud fraud is occurring (A9513). When the irregularity of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the irregularity of the special winning opening is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the improper winning award occurrence flag regarding the special winning opening is saved in the improper flag area by the improper and winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the improper winning opening is being generated. In the case where the special winning opening illegality is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

  When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a connector of the switch (the above-described switch abnormality 1 error) is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data of the game machine error state signal to the test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y”), if the panel radio fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the frame radio fraud is generated Is in progress (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the irregularity of the telephone is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the irregularity of the winning opening is occurring (the result of A9514 is “Y”). Y "), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9517), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518). By setting the ON data of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

  After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start-up signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the start-up opening (A9520).

  Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is output to the external information output data. The area is saved in the area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 outputs the ON data of the symbol determination number signal to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process ends.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed (during the setting changeable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a light emission mode (lighting / light-off mode).

  During the change of the probability setting, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure change display game of the collective display device 50 irrespective of the state of the gaming machine 10 (game state or the like) at the time of power-off before power-on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively performs the predetermined display during the change of the probability setting regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (variable setting state), the probability setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display unit 51, 52 for the special figure variable display game which is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be performed.

  In FIG. 34A, while the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state), a predetermined special figure change display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 change display game of the collective display device 50 is displayed. The probability set value (here, 6) is displayed. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, the first special figure change display unit 51 performs a display different from that when the change is stopped (a display different from the normal display), so that the gaming machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a change display game). Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. Note that, in the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used.

  For example, the game control device 100 determines the third output port 135 and the third output port 135 based on the probability set value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability set value and the probability set value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability set value. The output data may be output to the four output ports 136, and the work probability set value or the probability set value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (A1603- of output processing). A1608).

  Note that the probability set value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the probability set value may be lighted or blinked using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

  Furthermore, even if the probability setting value is made weaker than usual and the probability setting value is lit or blinked, it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value in a place away from the gaming machine 10. Good.

  In FIG. 34B, a changing information display indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) while the probability setting is being changed. (For example, the letter “P”) is displayed. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the same identification information (special design) as the change-in-progress information display (for example, the character “P”) is not used. Shall be.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the output data related to the display of the changing information to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. May be executed (processing steps are added to FIG. 10), and the changing information display may be lit on or flashed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At the time (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is lit on or flashed on the first special figure change display section 51 (LED lamp D1). You may.

  The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be lit or blinked using both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34C, during the change of the probability setting, the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the fluctuation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 as a predetermined display. . In the present embodiment, the outlier result (outer design) is a display in which the center segment of the first special figure change display section 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) is turned on. In this manner, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 during the change of the probability setting, it is possible to suggest from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. The RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the result of the loss (missing design) is displayed while the probability setting is being changed, thereby initializing the data displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51. In some cases, the value setting (A2419) becomes unnecessary.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the result of the loss (the loss symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. A process for generating output data relating to display is executed (processing steps are added to FIG. 10), and the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). . Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At this time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the loss result may be displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). .

  In addition, the display of the outlier result may be lit on the second special figure change display unit 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 change display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the display of the outlier result may be lit by using both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34D, while the probability setting is being changed, a light-off display is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. Note that, in the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the light-off display is not used.

  For example, the game control device 100 transmits the first characteristic to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 from when the power is turned on (power is restored) until the probability setting value is changed (the result of A2406 is “Y”). The output data for the figure variation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51.

  The second special figure change display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 change display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. In addition, both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 may be turned off.

  In FIG. 34A to FIG. 34D, during the change of the probability setting, the LED lamps (for example, the LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure change display game are turned off. Alternatively, the animation may be displayed by turning on the light cyclically.

  In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, during the change of the probability setting, all display units (that is, all light-emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked, so that the predetermined display is obtained. , The all-lit display or the all-blink display is displayed on the collective display device 50. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by performing a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the collective display device 50 at the time of the fluctuation stop, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is impossible to play the game in front of the gaming machine 10. Can be specified.

  Note that the all-blinking display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 displays all the lights or blinks on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. A process of generating output data related to the display may be performed to display the all-lit display or the all-blinked display on the collective display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At this time (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the all-on display or the all-flashing display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). .

  FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, a performance display related to the performance (specifications) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. The performance display is printed, but may be displayed by light emission of an LED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As the performance display, the big hit probability display 85a "1/300 and 1/200" at the time of the low probability in the setting 1 (lowest setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), the display of the number of award balls 85b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14," the upper limit of the number of rounds A value display 85c "2, 6, 16", a model (formal name) display 85d "CRxxxxxx", and a display 85e (here, "no limit") indicating whether or not there is a limit related to the probability change big hit are displayed.

  In the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls of the starting prize port 36, the normal variable prize apparatus 37, the general prize port 35, and the special variable prize apparatus 39 are sequentially displayed. The limit relating to the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive variable probability jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (a single jackpot can generate a predetermined number of hits (number of consecutive play). Become).

  Since the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the free space around the collective display device 50. In addition, the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), and the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is set to 1 (lowest setting) and 6 (highest setting). Either one (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the big hit probability (1/300 to 1/200) at the time of low probability may be displayed.

  Among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 (the jackpot probabilities of the settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) are collectively outside the game area 32. The information may be displayed in an empty area of a member separate from the display device 50. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 on this separate member may be displayed in duplicate. For example, the big hit probability at the time of low probability with respect to the setting 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the upper right, lower left, upper left free space of the game board of FIG. 2A, or a member (guide rail 31) that divides the game area 32. You may. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in a free area in the game area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 at the lower left). In addition, the display 85e of the presence or absence of the limit related to the probability change jackpot is displayed as "limited" only when there is a limit, and there is no need to display anything when there is no limit. Thus, the items displayed as performance indicators around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds at the time of the big hit is displayed on a separate area or the display device 41, and some or all items displayed as the performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary. It does not have to be displayed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may display, on the display device 41, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, and the like during the setting change, the setting confirmation, and / or the waiting for the customer. . The effect control device 300 may store the big hit probability at the time of low probability in a memory (the program ROM 321 or the like) in advance. Note that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. Switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be executed by operating an operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B show a predetermined display (here, the probability setting value 6) on the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52 of the collective display device 50 during the change of the probability setting. In the case where is displayed, a configuration is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (especially the probability setting value) from the oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 during the change of the probability setting.

  In FIG. 35 (A), two depressions 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided on the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure change display part 51 or the second special figure is provided in each of the depressions 51a and 51b. A change display section 52 is provided. In FIG. 35 (B), an annular wall 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Hereinafter, the control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 using the effect control program will be described.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “B ****”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect controller 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, a command reception interruption process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, effect controller 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the power-on initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, effect controller 300 clears a WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Thereafter, effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a clock unit (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, the configuration may be such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. Then, effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be selected so that the selection rate at a long time interval becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by performing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, a lottery may be selected so that the selection rate of a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. An effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for receiving operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by a person in charge of a game arcade (game store) or a player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs an effect point control process of adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by performing a production or operation that is the target of production point addition, and at the end of a game, for example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by randomly selecting a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability according to the set value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selectivity of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes a received command received from game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. An effect display editing process is performed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the rendering preparation to the display frame buffer is completed, and the rendering command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 An instruction to draw a screen is issued (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame switching is performed, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (１ ／ of the frame period). . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 second.

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from speaker 19 (B0019).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) including the LEDs (B0020). In the decoration control processing, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (a board effect device 44, a frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control processing, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

  Then, after finishing the process of B0021 described above, effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing (B0014) in the main processing (FIG. 36) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as a command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the number of received commands is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and thus the received command check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, data is not overwritten.

  Then, effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read out in the order of the indexes and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N )), And repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, the analysis of the received command is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the received command to analyze the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 37) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a received command analysis process performed by effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE part and the lower byte into an ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of the command. You. Therefore, the higher order and lower order of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction or the like). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). Note that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special decoration symbol, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). If the MODE section indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the range of the big hit command (B1207). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a performance during a jackpot, and includes, for example, a fanfare command (set in processing during special figure display), a round command (fanfare / interval). Middle process), an interval command (set during the special winning opening process), an ending command (set during the special winning opening process), and the like. If the MODE section indicates a jackpot-related command (result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent the jackpot-related command (result of B1207 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol-related command (B1209). The symbol-related commands include a decorative special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decorative special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbolic command (result of B1209 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section falls within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section indicates a one-shot command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the range of the prefetching symbol command (B1213). . The look-ahead design related commands include the aforementioned look-ahead stop design command (A3014 in FIG. 15). If the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol-related command (result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-reading symbol-related command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the prefetching symbol command (the result of B1213 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes the aforementioned prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE section indicates the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( The result of B1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a single-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot system command process ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed (B1304), and a single-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE section indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the command at the time of restoration from the power failure (the result of B1305 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demonstration command ( B1307). If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the mode part displays the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (A2917, A3207). It is determined whether or not to proceed (B1309). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A2917, A3203). ) Is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command (step B1313). B1315). As the error / illegal command, for example, a fraudulent command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud occurs), a fraud release command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud is released), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a state ON command, generation of a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame) Release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  If the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or improper notification is executed (B1316). The one-shot command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the mode switching command (processing during special figure display). Is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an effect mode switching command (result of B1317 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out-ball count command. (B1319). If the MODE section indicates the out-ball count command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball count reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE section does not represent the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then proceeds to the MODE section for counting commands (A3107, A3111 big winning opening count commands). Is determined (B1321). If the MODE section indicates a count command (result of B1321 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1321 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. If the MODE section indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

  If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command (result of B1323 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of the setting change command include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). If the MODE section indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), a setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting processing, the contents of the setting change type command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for a setting change instruction is received, a setting change instruction display for urging a player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41 in the setting change information setting processing.

  If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). . As a command of the setting confirmation system, for example, there is a command (A2508) for confirming a probability set value, and a command (A2512) for finishing confirmation of a probability set value. If the MODE section indicates a setting confirmation type command (result of B1327 is “Y”), a setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting processing, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section command is a normal command ( B1330).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is performed after all symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which the present process is executed, the game state flag is changed to the flag of “changed”, “big hit”, “small hit”. Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the look-ahead symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetching symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, if the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). When the latest suspension information is the information of the special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is “Y”), the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations. Save (B1602).

  If the latest suspension information is not the special figure 1 reservation information (result of B1601 is “N”), effect controller 300 is the decoration special figure reservation number command received most recently is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number (B1603).

  After steps B1602 and B1603, effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variable command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the game control device 100 transmits the pre-reading symbol system command followed by the pre-reading variable system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol command processing ends.

[Prefetch variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, details of the prefetch variation command processing (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetch variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch variation command (B1701). When the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of the prefetch variable command is waiting. If the reception of the prefetch variable command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable command processing ends. If reception of a prefetch variable command is waiting (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds in the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703), The sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and the number of pending parts. The prefetch variable command area (special figure 1 prefetch variable command area or special figure 2 prefetch variable command area) is saved (B1708). Then, a pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the change starts the change display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, a longer first half change occurs, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, a shorter first half change occurs. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half change is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

  Further, since the type of the reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal prefetching change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 uses the ACT part (the value of the latter half variation) of the prefetch variation command as it is without converting it, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop and miss, normal reach +1 stop and miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT units indicating the reach of the same system into the same sub-internal prefetch variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is not normal (result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetch variation command processing is terminated.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), effect controller 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variable command area. (B1711), a prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include a continuous notice effect (including a look-ahead effect with a chance), a look-ahead zone effect, a change notice on hold, and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending prefetch notice effect (hold change notice) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending pre-reading effect is generated (result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1714).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetch notice effect (hold change notice) to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). In the case where the prefetch notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch variation command processing ends.

  On the other hand, effect control device 300 determines that the latest pending prefetch notice effect does not occur (result of B1713 is “N”), or that the generated prefetch notice effect is not an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “N”). ), As it is. The prefetch variable command processing ends.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a symbol command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols in the special figures 1 and 2 changes, the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a lost symbol, a 2R probability variable hit symbol (2R-A1, etc.) shown in FIG. 27, a 2R normal variable hit symbol (2R-A2, etc.), and a 6R probability variable hit symbol (6R-A1). Etc.), 6R normal big hit symbol (6R-A2 etc.), 16R positive variable big hit symbol (16R-A1 etc.), and 16R normal big hit symbol (16R-A2 etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and the symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent is determined. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variable system command of a loss is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends.

  If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and determines the effect during the variation. A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous announcement effect (the remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

(Variable effect setting processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the fluctuation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described fluctuation command processing (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the variation that does not enter the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first-half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, the model code, the special map type, the production mode, and the set value (probability set value) A group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without the reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation pattern type is the variation with reach, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. (B2005).

  After steps B2003 and B2005, effect control device 300 performs a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change (before reach) (B2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. Subsequently, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the symbol type, and the set value (probability set value) is set (B2007). The address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and a lottery of a notice that appears during the second-half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation command (the fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and the main reach content can be known from the fluctuation command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Thereafter, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed in accordance with the contents of the fluctuation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, a stray eye is determined in the case of a missing symbol.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs display setting of a variable effect such as a reach effect (B2013), and performs display setting of a notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and, for example, a display for reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure changing this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode based on light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (the board decorating device 46, the frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc., of each LED) determined by the decorative number. .

  In addition, it is possible not only to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the effect contents but also to set the lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure change corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special design other than the above-described first to third special designs that fluctuate on the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation related to (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol change is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, the details of the big hit command processing (B1208) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the jackpot-related command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit command indicates a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds of the current big hit. Subsequently, the game status flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare (B2103), and the big hit command processing ends. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from a symbol type determined from a symbol command (decorative special figure command corresponding to a stopped symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received jackpot-related command does not represent a fanfare (result of B2101 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the jackpot-related command represents a round (step B2101). B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot-related command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and the current gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the big hit command processing is ended.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE unit indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and executes the current game of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the big hit command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received jackpot-related command does not represent an interval (result of B2107 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the jackpot-related command indicates an ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, Ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the big hit command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit command processing without executing any processing. I do.

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuating display game that fluctuates and displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, winning in the starting winning opening) (for example, the first special figure fluctuating display section 51). Alternatively, a game control means (game control device 100) that can be displayed on the second special figure change display section 52) is provided, and when the stop result of the change display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Let it. The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) can change the setting relating to the game condition (or the setting relating to the game) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which setting can be changed when power is supplied to the gaming machine 10, and can be used when power is cut off before shifting to the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (setting is being changed), a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10 indicates that the setting is being changed or that the gaming machine 10 (For example, a variable display game) can be indicated. In the variable setting state, the state of the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned off is maintained, and the normal display (outlier design, big hit design) or the like at the time of change stop is displayed on the display for the special figure change display game. Therefore, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the game can be played.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display, on the light-emitting unit (for example, the LED lamps D1 and D2), a variable display game in which the identification information is displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. . The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may cause all the light emitting units of the display device to blink in a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying an unusual display on the display device (collective display device 50), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is not possible to play a game. .

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information indicating the setting variable state in the setting variable state (during setting change) on the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display). (FIG. 34B).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a display different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game, it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is not possible to play the game.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the display unit (for example, the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52) in the setting variable state (setting is being changed). ) May be turned off (FIG. 34D).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), a display different from the normal display (a display different from when the fluctuation display game is stopped) is performed on the display unit for the fluctuation display game, so that the gaming machine 10 cannot play the game. Something can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, , May be displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52) (FIG. 34C).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game, it is possible to suggest from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) from the time the setting is changed, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initialized at the end of the setting change. No need to set value.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  The first embodiment relates to a chance look-ahead effect (miss chance look-ahead notice) using a missing symbol. A chance that is a specific stop result mode (specific loss stop symbol mode) of the decorative special figure change display game can be randomly selected or selected according to a set value (probability set value), and a set value is suggested or notified by the chance eye. to enable.

[Stop symbol setting processing]
The stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the stop symbol setting process (B2012) executed by the effect control device 300 in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) when executing the special figure variable display game. In the stop symbol setting process, a stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure change display game according to the received change system command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure change display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is “Y”), a big hit stop symbol (“2, 2, 2” or the like) is randomly selected according to the symbol type (B1802) (B2302).

  When the special figure change display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines that the number of prefetching effects of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous announcement effect (the remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (B2303). If the number of prefetching effects (the number of remaining consecutive announcement effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is "Y"), the flow shifts to the process of step B2308. The initial value of the number of prefetching effects (remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is based on the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the prefetch target, that is, the expectation of the jackpot of the special figure change display game executed by the hold of the prefetch target. May be set.

  If the number of prefetching effects (the number of remaining consecutive announcement effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets the chance-stopped symbol mode (chance-eye mode, missing symbol group) as the target of prefetching. It is set according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the hold (B2304). The chance stop symbol design mode is a normal mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or reported, a special mode in which the set value can be suggested (setting mode), and a fixed mode in which the set value can be reported definitely. (Setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

  For example, when the special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game related to the hold of the prefetch target (start memory), the chance stop pattern is set to the normal mode, and the special 2 reach (SP2 reach) is set. Can be set to a special mode when an error occurs, and can be set to a fixed mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, the degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach, so that the chance stop pattern can be set according to the expectation degree of the hold big hit of the prefetch target. Conversely, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game related to the hold of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set to the normal mode, and when SP2 reach occurs, the special mode is set to the special mode. The determination mode may be set when the SP3 reach occurs.

  As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the reach type (reach effect system) of the hold of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the hold of the prefetch target. Can be set. Therefore, the expectation degree of the jackpot of the hold of the prefetch target can be notified as the prefetch effect by the chance eye stop symbol mode. It should be noted that the reach type that occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target can be known from the prefetch fluctuation pattern command as the prefetch fluctuation command (B1215) and the content of the fluctuation effect (B2010).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) that suggests or reports a set value (B2305). When the chance stop symbol pattern is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (result of B2305 is “N”), the stop symbol from the normal symbol mode (losing symbol group) is independent of the set value. (B2306), and the stopped symbol setting process ends. If the chance stop symbol pattern is the special mode or the fixed mode, and the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is “Y”), if the special mode is selected, the special pattern is shifted from the lost symbol mode (losing symbol group). With the lottery probability according to the set value, the stop stop symbol is selected by lottery, and if it is the fixed mode, the stop stop symbol is determined (determined) from the fixed symbol mode (miss symbol group) according to the set value (B2307). .

  If the number of prefetching effects (the number of remaining consecutive announcement effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes a setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) that suggests or reports a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform (B2308). For example, when a lottery is performed and a winning is performed, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is performed. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (result of B2308 is “N”), a stop stop symbol is randomly selected regardless of the set value (B2309). When the setting suggestion effect is performed (result of B2308 is “Y”), a lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value is drawn (B2310). As described above, even when the number of prefetching effects (the number of remaining consecutive announcement effects) is 0 and the chance look-ahead effect is not performed (result of B2303 is “Y”), the setting suggestion effect is independent of the chance look-ahead effect. I can do it.

  The processes in steps B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance stop pattern]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye look-ahead effect. There are a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a fixed mode (setting notification mode) in the chance stop symbol mode.

  For example, "2,4,6" (blue), "1,5,9" (green), and "3,7,7" (red) are included in the outlier symbol mode (outlier symbol group) in the normal mode. There is a stop symbol. For example, the special symbol mode (color pattern group) includes “2, 4, 6” (green), “1, 5, 9” (red), and “3, 7, 7” (blue). There is a stop symbol. Regarding the out-of-design pattern (out-of-design pattern group) in the fixed mode, the colors are not related to “○, 1, 1”, “○, 2, 2”, “○, 3, 3”, “○, 4, 4”, “○, 5”. , 5 "and" ○, 6, 6 ". In addition, the symbol “の う ち” indicates an arbitrary symbol different from two of the three decorative identification symbols (identification information) on the left and right, which are aligned with the right one on the right and the right.

  It should be noted that the loss stop symbol in the fixed mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, gold, rainbow, etc. other than blue, green, and red) and a shape not used in the normal mode and the special mode. It may be distinguished to make it easier.

  In the normal mode, the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lottery of each missing stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expected degree) of each setting when one outlier stop symbol in the normal mode is selected is the same (100/6 ≒ 17%). The probability in FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each set value that can be guessed by the player when the specific outage stop symbol is displayed. For this reason, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or notified. In the example of FIG. 47, the selection rate of the loss stop symbol in the normal mode in one lottery is 100/3 ($ 33.3)%.

  In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each outlier stop symbol is determined so as to differ depending on the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expected degree) of each setting when one outage stop symbol of the special mode is selected is different (may be the same for some settings). For this reason, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

  In the confirmation mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each outlier stop symbol is set to 100% for only one predetermined setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, when one outage stop symbol in the fixed mode is selected, the probability (expected degree) of one predetermined setting becomes 100%, and the probability (expectation) of another setting is set. Degree) is 0%. For this reason, the fixed mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be notified definitely.

  It should be noted that the three decorative identification symbols in the special mode have specific colors, so that a set value can be suggested. For example, the set value cannot be suggested for the outage stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode. However, the special stop pattern "2,4,6" (green) which has the same numeral portion as the normal stop pattern "2,4,6" (blue) but has a different color only has a specific color ( (Green) indicates a set value. Note that the three decorative identification symbols in the special mode may have a specific shape to suggest a set value.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting the chance-stop pattern (step S2, missing symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance-eye stop symbol mode is randomly selected and set at a different selection rate (allocation rate) depending on whether the special figure change display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target is a big hit or not. Therefore, similarly to the case where the chance stop symbol design mode is set corresponding to the reach type of the hold of the prefetch target, in the example of FIG. Expectations can be reported. It is known from the symbol type (B1802) whether the reservation of the prefetch target is a big hit or a miss.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (A), the expectation degree of the jackpot of the hold of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of the normal mode <the special mode <the confirmed mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48B, the expectation degree of the jackpot of the hold of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of the fixed mode <the special mode <the normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48 (B), the setting (setting value) is determined by the determining mode even if the determining mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the big hit of the hold of the prefetch target is low. The player will not be discouraged.

  If the selection rates of the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode in FIG. 48 are the same as the selection rates of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach, the special figure variation display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target as described above. This is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode in response to the occurrence of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach.

  In addition, according to the number of big hits from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 or the start of the game, the number of consecutive cottages from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal gaming state (the number of consecutive chan), the operating time of the gaming machine 10 increases, A configuration in which the selectivity of the confirmation mode is increased is also possible. Since the confirmation mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

  As described above, the chance-stop symbol pattern is associated with the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the prefetch target, and the stop-stop symbol pattern of the chance-stop pattern (especially the special mode, the fixed mode) is randomly selected with a probability according to the set value. it can. As a result, the missing stop symbols are randomly selected with the result (big hit or missing) of the special figure change display game relating to the suspension of the prefetch target and the probability (selection rate) according to the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
FIG. 49A and FIG. 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the second embodiment.

  (A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variation display game. The change (↓↓↓) of the decoration special design (large design) is being executed in the change display area 610, and the change (↓↓↓) of the decoration reduction design (small design) is being executed in the change display area 615. The special figure 1 hold number display section 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number “2” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The indicated numeral "0" is displayed.

  The hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) includes a first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as a first hold display (first start memory display), and a second hold display (second start display). (2 start storage display). The first hold display section 630a displays two hold displays 633 as first hold displays. At this time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display section 630b. Further, a reserved digestion area 640 of a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the running special figure fluctuating display game (starting memory that has been the right to execute this special figure fluctuating display game) is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

  Thereafter, in (A), a hold (first start memory) is generated by winning in the start winning port 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the generated hold is changed from the normal mode by the hold change notice. Color) has changed. Then, with the occurrence of the jackpot having a high degree of expectation being held as the target of the look-ahead, a chance look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect) is set (B1712, B1716). In addition, the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 increases to a number “3”.

  Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game is ended, and the first chance first look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the stop pattern “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode. . Here, the whole or a part of the stop stop symbol may be blinked so that the player recognizes that it is the chance look-ahead effect. At the end of the decorative special figure change display game, the change pending display 633a has been deleted. In the normal mode, the player cannot estimate the setting (set value).

  Thereafter, in (d), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display section 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640. Also, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 decreases to “2”.

  Then, in (e), the decorative special figure variation display game is ended, and the second chance look-ahead effect is performed in the special stop mode (setting suggestion mode) of the stop stop pattern “1, 5, 9” (red). Performed on display. Here, the whole or a part of the missing stop symbol may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is the chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is suggested by the special form of the stop stop symbol, and the player can estimate the setting (set value) (according to FIG. 47, the probability of setting 4 is high).

  Thereafter, in (f), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display section 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640. Also, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 decreases to “1”.

  Then, in (g) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure variation display game is ended, and the third chance look-ahead effect is performed in the departure stop pattern “1, 6, 6” in the fixed mode (setting notification mode). Performed on display. Here, the whole or a part of the missing stop symbol may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is the chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is definitely notified by the outage stop symbol in the fixed mode, and the player can recognize the setting (set value) (according to FIG. 47, the setting 6 is determined).

  In the case of the fixed mode, a line 635 may be displayed as a character image. The line 635 is selected according to the setting (set value) determined by the loss stop symbol in the determined mode. For example, when the setting 6 (set value 6) is determined by the off stop symbol “○, 6, 6” as shown in (g), “congratulations!” Is displayed, but the off stop symbol “○, 1” is displayed. , 1 ", the setting 1 (set value 1) is confirmed," Sorry "may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in (h), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed due to the suspension of the prefetch target. The hold display 633 moves to the right side (hold shift), and the hold display 633 (black) to be prefetched at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640. Also, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 decreases to “0”.

  Thereafter, in (k), the special decoration figure change display game is ended, the change pending display 633a is erased, and the big hit stop symbols "5, 5, 5" are displayed. Then, in (K), a big hit round starts as a special game state.

  Regarding the screen transition described above, even in the special mode (e) of FIG. 49A, a line as a character image may be displayed. The serif may be selected according to the special pattern of the stop stop. In addition, a configuration that suggests the setting can be made by a combination of a line and a special pattern of a stop stop. For example, in the combination of the outage stop symbol "1, 5, 9" (red) and the line "congratulations!", The probability of setting 6 (set value 6) is increased, and the outage stop symbol "1, 5, 9" (Red) and the line "sorry", the probability of setting 1 (set value 1) may be increased.

  In addition, regarding the screen transition of FIG. 49 described above, the whole or a part of the disconnection stop symbol may be made to blink so as to be conspicuous only when the disconnection stop symbol in the confirmed mode is displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 49, the chance stop symbol pattern in the three chance look-ahead effects is different each time, but the same chance stop symbol pattern may be used each time. And this same aspect may be determined according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the suspension of the prefetch target.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game) that varies and displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) based on establishment of a start condition (for example, winning in a winning opening). ) Is displayed on the display device 41. When the stop result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode (big hit result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. Generate. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) related to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store a start memory which is a right to execute the variable display game based on establishment of the start condition. Prior determination means (for example, the game control device 100) executes execution information (for example, the fluctuation display game) of the fluctuation display game related to the start memory before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means is executed. Is determined before the variation display game based on the start memory is executed.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines whether the stop result mode of the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) is not the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a fixed mode), it is possible to execute a preview effect (a chance look ahead effect, a chance look ahead notice) based on the determination result of the advance determination unit. Further, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) uses the specific stop result mode (for example, the special mode, the fixed mode) to perform a setting-related effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests or reports a setting (setting value). It is feasible.

  Therefore, in the announcement effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, it is possible to suggest or notify the setting (set value), so that the player not only estimates whether or not a big hit will occur, but also sets (set value). Can be guessed, and the notice effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the announcement effect, even if the degree of expectation of the big hit is low, the player has more fun in estimating the setting (set value), and the interest in the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect control unit (the effect control device 300) can execute the setting-related effect when the plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) of the specific stop result mode have the specific color. . Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (special decoration pattern) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) converts a plurality of pieces of identification information (missing stop symbols) of a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a fixed mode) into the specific stop result mode. This is selected when the derived variable display game is executed (FIGS. 43, 44, 46). Therefore, a plurality of pieces of identification information (missing stop symbols) can be selected when executing the variable display game, not at the time of the preliminary determination, so that the load of the process (control) at the time of the preliminary determination is reduced.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of gaming machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a configuration of a game control device 100 (main board) and the like disposed on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  A game control device 100 (main board) for integrally controlling the game via a switch base 738 is provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the game control device 100 via a control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from the device is provided. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back of the effect control device 300 and the upper portion of the back of the game control device 100 is provided. In a state where the game board 30 thus configured is housed in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protection cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back surface of the game board 30 project behind the front frame 12. I do.

  A storage unit 750 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and aligns the stored game balls to flow down is disposed on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12. . A payout unit 790 that pays out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is provided in one inside portion of the front frame 12.

  In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100 and a game ball based on a rotation operation of the operation handle 24 are provided on a lower portion of the back surface of the front frame 12. A ball launching device 742 for launching, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are provided.

  A setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button switch) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing the setting relating to the game condition are provided on the lower rear portion of the game control device 100. , A button switch) and a 7-segment type probability set value display device 143 (display, LED lamp). As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessed) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting change device 42, and cannot check the display of the probability set value display device 143. In addition, since the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the internal characters 44a, 44b and the external character 95a described later is performed. There is no concealment (overlap).

  The probability set value display device 143 only needs to be provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b or the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front of the game board 30, for example. In the case where the probability set value is displayed so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, a display (LED lamp) or the like of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability set value display device 143. May be used as the probability set value display device 143. Further, even in the case where the probability set value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, it is preferable that only the operator can visually recognize it without being seen by the player. For example, when the operator performs a specific operation on the effect button 25, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible. Further, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible by a player using a special member (for example, a polarizing filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting change device 42 is set to be accessible when the front frame 12 is opened. However, the setting change device 42 is provided on the front surface of the game board 30, the display device 41, or the like, and when the operator performs a specific operation or the like. You may make it operable.

  Also, the accessory ratio display section 68 of the state display device 152 for displaying the accessory ratio described later with reference to FIG. 78A may be used as the probability set value display device 143, or the state display device as the probability set value display device 143. In the case of using the accessory ratio display unit 152, four 7-segment type displays (8-segment type display including a point portion) 900 of the accessory ratio display unit 68 during setting change or setting confirmation. May be displayed on any one of them (for example, the leftmost or rightmost indicator 900). It should be noted that while the setting is being changed or the setting is not being confirmed, the accessory ratio display section 68 displays the accessory ratio. Therefore, the accessory ratio display section 68 can be used for both displaying the accessory ratio and displaying the set value.

  Further, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this manner, the operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who commits a fraud can be prevented, and the crime prevention effect can be enhanced. Further, when a cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether or not the cover member has covered the setting key switch 93. By inputting a detection signal from the detection sensor to, for example, the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member has covered the setting key switch 93. . For example, when the cover member does not cover the front of the setting key switch 93 even though the front frame 12 is closed, the game control device 100 sends an error notification to the display device 41, the speaker 19, the LED, By using a lamp or the like, it is possible to take security measures and countermeasures against fraud.

[Production control device according to third embodiment]
Next, the configuration of an effect control device 300 (sub-board) according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  In the effect control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the effect control device 300 of the first embodiment is provided with a movable body control circuit 334a instead of the board effect movable body control 334 (FIG. 4).

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (eg, the frame decoration device 18 and the like), and a movable body control circuit. 334a is provided.

  The movable body control circuit 334a controls the drive of the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the drive of the frame effect device 95 provided on the glass frame 15.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the board effect device 44 includes internal members 44a and 44b (inside movable members) that enhance the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

  FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

  The internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is accommodated on the back of the center case 40 so as to be invisible to the player, and is positioned in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the upper side of the display device 41. . On the internal accessory 44a, a character "hot" that indicates that the jackpot is expected to be particularly high is drawn. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is positioned in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, on the internal accessory 44b, a character "♪" is drawn to notify that the jackpot is highly expected. A sound may be generated from the speaker along with the movement of the internal accessory 44b.

  Note that the effect control device 300 performs the lottery operation of the internal characters 44a and 44b at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the preliminary lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. I can suggest. Then, the player has more fun in estimating the set value, and the interest in the game is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outside movable member) that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

  FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame effect device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open portion) according to the third embodiment operates.

  The external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as to be invisible to a player, and becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15 by driving the frame effect device 95. Protrude. On the external accessory 95a, a character 95b notifying that the jackpot is highly expected is drawn. The frame effect device 95 may be provided not only on the glass frame 15 but also on the front frame 12.

  Note that the effect control device 300 can suggest the set value if the external accessory 95a is drawn and operated at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the advance lottery in steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. . Then, the player has more fun in estimating the set value, and the interest in the game is improved.

  Then, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable object control circuit 334a.

(Movable body control processing)
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the movable body control process according to the third embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is restored.

  When it is determined that the power is not turned on (result of B3001 is “N”), effect control device 300 starts normal control processing according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like. (B3003). On the other hand, when it is determined that power is turned on (result of B3001 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting has been received (B3002).

  It is determined that the command whose probability setting is being changed is being received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the single command processing (FIG. 39) (result of B1325 is “Y”). Is done. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body part) is opened (result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028). Is "Y"), and the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). When the setting change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed during the change of the probability setting, the set value related to the game condition is changed. In addition, information of the set value related to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

  When it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has been received (result of B3002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for ending the change of the probability setting has been received ( B3004).

  It is determined that the probability setting change end command is received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the probability setting change end command in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (result of B1325 is “Y”). Is done. In other words, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is “Y”), and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the command to end the probability setting change is a game. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300 (A2421).

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the main body frame opening error has occurred. It is determined whether or not an error is occurring (B3006). For example, when a status ON command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the change of the probability setting has been received (result of B3004 is “Y”), that is, if the change of the probability setting has been completed, the body frame opening error is occurring. It is determined whether or not (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the change of the probability setting has not been received (result of B3004 is “N”), that is, when the change of the probability setting is being performed, the internal character object 44a, Only at 44b, the initial operation control process is started (B3005).

  In the initial operation control processing (B3005) of the internal characters 44a, 44b, for example, the motor for moving the internal characters 44a and the motor for moving the internal characters 44b of the board production device 44 are driven, respectively, to thereby generate the internal characters 44a, 44b. Is operated in front of the display device 41 and then controlled to operate to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b is performed. As described above, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are sequentially executed. In the case where other internal characters different from the internal characters 44a and 44b are further attached, similarly, the initial operation control of each internal character is sequentially executed. Note that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b may be executed simultaneously in parallel.

  When the effect control device 300 determines that the body frame opening error is occurring (the result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open, the internal The initial operation control process is started only for 44a and 44b (B3005). In this way, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal characters 44a and 44b when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, and It functions as a regulating unit that regulates the initial operation of the object 95a so as not to execute it.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the main frame opening error is not occurring (B3006 is “N”), that is, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed, the effect control device 300 The restriction on the initial operation of the accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a is started (B3007).

  In the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the internal operations 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 perform the same initial operation control as the process of B3005. In the external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95, a motor for moving the external accessory 95a is driven to operate the external accessory 95a so as to protrude from above the glass frame 15 (open portion), and then to the initial position. The operation is controlled (initial operation control). In this way, the effect control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operations of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessories 95a. When another external character different from the external character 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external character 95a and the initial operation control of the other external character are sequentially executed.

  In the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44a, 44b having a large number of movable accessories is longer than that of the external accessory 95a. Is longer than the time required for the initial operation control. It should be noted that regardless of the number of movable characters, even when the production of the internal characters 44a and 44b is plural and the operation is complicated, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal characters 44a and 44b is longer than that of the external characters. This is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the object 95a. In addition, between the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (open portion) (for example, at a position intermediate between the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessories 95a), a movable member that moves toward the center of the gaming machine 10, for example. In the case where an additional accessory is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory as well as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is open, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted and is not executed in the same manner as the initial operation of the external accessory 95a.

  When the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is open, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted so as not to be executed. Only the initial operation of the entire movable member) is restricted, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external accessory 95a, the movable members of the external accessory 95a other than the initial operation (the second effect portion, the second movable member, The initial mode such as the motion mode (for example, vibration or swing) of the character 95b) or the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting member (the second rendering unit, the second movable member) (for example, the eyes (LED) of the character 95b emits light) can be executed. It may be. That is, such a second production unit can switch the production mode to the initial mode in the initial state before the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second production unit is performed. By doing in this way, even when the initial operation of the first production section is not performed due to the restriction of the initial operation of the first production section, the second production section 95a is opened inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main body section). Can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing of the comparative example.

  First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

  When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are turned on, and the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. . Before the power is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. However, since the game control device 100 and the like are not operating, the probability setting is performed until the power is turned on. The value change flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Further, an initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted and is not executed.

  The probability set value changing flag is turned on by being set in the main processing (FIG. 5B) (A1038), and the probability set value check mode flag is set in the probability set value check processing (FIG. 11). (A2505), it is turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2508 in FIG. 11). When the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state ON command indicating a main frame open error (front frame open error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

  When the change of the probability set value by the operator is completed at time T2 (A2414, A2415 in FIG. 10), the probability set value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability set value check mode flag is set and turned on. (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off. However, in the third embodiment, the change of the probability setting value is completed by the completion of the change of the probability setting value. It is assumed that the medium flag is turned off and the flag during the probability set value confirmation mode is turned on. As in the first embodiment, the flag during the probability setting value confirmation mode may be omitted, and the flag during the change in the probability setting value may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

  Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time T3, the probability set value check mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

  At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control processing of the internal character 44a is completed, and the initial operation control processing of the internal character 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a (initial operation time) is the same, but may be different. For example, the initial operation time of the internal accessories 44a and 44b, which are likely to be in a complicated operation mode, may be longer than the initial operation time of the external accessory 95a. Further, effect control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of internal accessories 44a, 44b, so that the initial operation time of internal accessories 44a, 44b is shorter than the initial operation time of external accessory 95a. May be.

  When the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204) indicating that no main frame open error has occurred. ) Is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as an error / illegal command. Then, the regulation of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). Thus, in the initial operation control processing of the present embodiment, the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is open.

  At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44b ends. As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is started prior to the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a, and the initial operation control of the external accessory 95a is performed. The processing ends before the processing.

  Thereafter, at the time t3, the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a ends, so that the gaming machine 10 can play the game.

  Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. Note that the probability set value changing flag, the probability set value check mode flag, and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also transmitted from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. It is turned on and off.

  Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not perform the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (body frame) at time T1. Control processing is executed. Therefore, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example is started at the same timing (time T4).

  After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a ends, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is a time at which the game can be played on the gaming machine 10 according to the initial operation control processing according to the present embodiment as described above.

  Then, at time t4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b ends, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also play a game. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time at which the game can be played is later than the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the internal accessories 44a and 44b are turned on at time T1 to execute the initial operation control process. However, when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, the external accessories 95a An internal accessory in which the initial operation control process is executed at the same timing as that described above may be provided. For example, the operating mode of a movable member (internal accessory) that affects the game, such as the opening and closing door 39c of the special winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. May perform an initial operation control process in accordance with the operation mode of the set value after the set value is set. By performing the initial operation control process after the setting values are set in this way, the movable members (the open / close door 39c of the special winning opening, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, the V winning opening ( It can be confirmed whether the movable member that opens and closes the predetermined area) operates normally in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the V winning opening, the V winning is notified and the big hit ends. The later probable change state (one of the high probability state, the specific game state, and the predetermined game state) is determined. Further, such initial operation control processing of the movable member affecting the game is executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4 but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. It may be that. Further, the initial operation control processing of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at the time T2 ends.

  The command during the change of the probability setting is that the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened (result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”) and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 is turned on. (The result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits the effect to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but the setting change device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12. May be transmitted when the setting key switch 93 is turned on. Further, after turning on the setting key switch 93, the command for changing the probability setting may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

  Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted). (State) A variable setting state in which the probability setting value can be changed may be set, and a state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed by setting the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode in the variable setting state may be used. Then, when the flag during the probability set value confirmation mode is set, both the operations of the internal characters 44a and 44b and the external characters 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed, or may be returned to the initial position. . When the flag during the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, the initial operation control processing of the internal characters 44a and 44b is executed in the same manner as when the command for changing the probability setting according to the present embodiment is transmitted. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 having an openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 or the front frame 12 (main body frame)) on which the gaming board 30 having the gaming area 32 according to the third embodiment is disposed, has a predetermined shape inside the frame. The inner movable members (internal accessories 44a, 44b) that perform the operation described above, the outer movable members (external accessory 95a) that perform predetermined operations outside the frame, and settings related to the game are changed by the establishment of predetermined conditions. A possible setting change means (setting change device 42) and control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operations of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are provided. The control unit can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and can change the setting while the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In the state, the initial operation of the outer movable member is not performed, and the initial operation of the inner movable member can be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the game machine 10 is powered on, the control means (effect control device 300) is in a state where the setting can be changed (for example, the setting changing means). Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or when the frame is opened), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, when operating the setting change means or when opening and closing the frame, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame, and in the gaming machine, the initial operation of the movable member is appropriately performed. Can be executed.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member (the inner accessory 44a, 44b) and the outer movable member (the outer accessory 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the setting display device can be prevented from being concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, the interruption of the operation of the operator is suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the state in which the setting can be changed ends, the control unit (the effect control device 300) releases the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (the external accessory 95a). Make it possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting change unit or opening and closing the frame.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (the effect control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (the external accessory 95a) to move the inner movable member (the inner part). The initial operation of the accessory 44a, 44b) is executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member having a longer time required for the initial operation control is started during the change in the probability setting, and the initial operation of the outer movable member having a shorter time required for the initial operation control is performed as follows. It is started by closing the frames (the front frame 12, the main frame) after the change of the probability setting. Therefore, compared to the case where the initial operations of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are started at the same time after the frame is closed, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes a longer time, can be started earlier, so that the game can be started. The time until the time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control unit (the effect control device 300) determines whether the setting changing unit (the setting changing device 42) is operated even when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Or, when the frames (the front frame 12 and the main body frame) are open, a regulating means (production control device 300) for regulating the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, the outer movable member does not move while the probability setting is being changed or the frame is open, so that it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

  The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening (glass frame 15) that is attached to the main body (front frame 12, main body frame) so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine 10 includes a first rendering unit (an external accessory 95a, a first movable member) that performs a predetermined operation outside the opening unit, and a setting change unit (setting) that can change a setting related to the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Change device 42) and control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect unit. The first rendering unit has a second rendering unit (character 95b, second movable member) that can switch the rendering mode in an initial state before performing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect unit and the initial operation of the first effect unit by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and change the settings while the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When the state is enabled, the initial operation of the first effect unit is not executed, and the initial mode of the second effect unit can be executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second production section (character 95b, second movable member) having a low possibility of contacting the operator or interfering with the frame is replaced with the first production section (external accessory 95a, (1 movable member) can be initialized in an initial mode prior to the initial operation.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Process when receiving set value]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the set value reception processing (B1324) in the single command processing (FIG. 39) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a setting value reception process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4001 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the set value ends. If it is a normal command (result of B4001 is “Y”), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, in order to perform a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value with a predetermined light emitting unit, effect controller 300 randomly selects a light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4003). . The predetermined light emitting unit is, for example, the protruding effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), and the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is a setting determining element that allows the player to estimate a setting (set value). In addition, the predetermined light emitting unit (production device) is not limited to the protruding production unit 13, but can be a lighting member capable of emitting light (a frame decoration device 18, a decoration device 22, a board decoration device 46, a special winning opening LED 39 d, etc.) and a display device 41. Display screen can be used.

[Lottery table of initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect randomly selected by the effect control device 300 when the setting value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining an initial light emission mode (initial color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). The selectivity and selectable types change.

  First, the fact that the type of initial color that can be selected changes according to the received setting value will be described. When the received set values are the settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as an initial color, if setting 5, red can be selected together with green, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. Will be possible. Therefore, when the initial color of the predetermined light-emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting is 4 or more, when the initial color is red, the setting is 5 or more, and when the rainbow is a rainbow, the setting is 5 or more. 6 can be estimated.

  Next, how the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery changes according to the received setting value will be described.

  When the received set value is set to 1, the selectivity of white is 80%, the selectivity of blue is 15%, and the selectivity of yellow is 5% as initial colors. Then, the selectivity of white as the initial color is set to 75% in the case of the setting 2, 70% in the case of the setting 3, and the like, such that the selectivity decreases as the received set value increases. . In the present embodiment, the white selectivity is set to decrease in increments of 5% each time the received set value increases by one. However, a certain set value range (for example, settings 4 to 6) May be set to be the same. As described above, the lower the set value is, the higher the selectivity of white as the initial color becomes. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting portion is white, It is easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting table.

  On the other hand, the selectivity of yellow as the initial color is 5% in the case of the setting 1, 10% in the case of the setting 2, and 15% in the case of the setting 3 to 6, and the received setting value is high. Is set so that the selectivity increases as In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

  The selection rates of the initial colors (green and red) that can be selected in the settings 4 and 5 and the initial colors (green, red and rainbow) that can be selected in the settings 6 are each set to 5%. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that a color other than white is selected as the initial color is higher. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 whose initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is other than white, It is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is likely to be a high setting table.

  The selection rate of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the selectivity of the rainbow in the setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selectivity of the other colors is appropriately adjusted such that the overall selectivity becomes 100% in accordance with the change in the selectivity of the rainbow.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 45) will be described as a mode in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a fanfare effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process ends. If the command is normal (result of B4101 is “Y”), the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4103). When the number of big hits is the predetermined number (result of B4103 is “Y”), effect control device 300 selects a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4104). The fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker are set according to the set values (B4105). The predetermined number of times can be set to three, six, nine,... For each specific (for example, three) multiple. The predetermined number may be a natural number. For example, the predetermined number may be set every odd number (1, 3,...) Or every integer number (2, 4,...) (1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13,..., A Fibonacci sequence).

  On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (result of B4103 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

(Emission promotion lottery table)
Next, referring to FIG. 58, regarding the selectivity of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by the promotion (step-up) lottery of the setting suggestive effect determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process at the start of the big hit. explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining the light emission mode by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment (deciding the promotion lottery color). FIG. 58 (A) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58 (B) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white is, for example, no promotion (continuation of white), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. Selection is made from six types, and the selectivity and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

  First, the fact that the type of selectable promotion lottery color changes according to the current setting value will be described. When the current setting values are the settings 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting 5, red can be selected together with green, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. It becomes selectable. Therefore, when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player has a setting of 4 or more, when the color is red, the setting is 5 or more, and when the color is rainbow, the setting is 5 or more. 6 can be estimated.

  Next, a description will be given of how the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected by lottery changes according to the current setting value.

  When the current setting value is setting 1, the selectivity of no promotion (continuation of white) is 80%, the selectivity of blue is 15%, and the selectivity of yellow is 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set to 75% in the case of the setting 2, 70% in the case of the setting 3, and the like so that the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Is done. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in increments of 5% each time the current setting value is increased by one. However, a range of a certain setting value (for example, setting 4 to 6) is set. ) May be set to be the same. As described above, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the promotion lottery color, so that the player is in a state where the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is in the game, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a low setting table.

  On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, and 15% in the case of setting 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. It is set so that the selectivity becomes higher as it becomes. In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

  In addition, the selection rates of the promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in the setting 4 or the setting 5 and the promotion lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in the setting 6 are set to 5%. . Therefore, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that a non-promotion (other than white continuation) is selected as the promotion lottery color is higher. Therefore, during the game, the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit changes due to the promotion. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is in the game, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a high-setting table. In addition, the promotion lottery can estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a high setting table, which can be motivated by the player to continue the game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58B, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue is, for example, no promotion (continuous blue), yellow, green, red, and rainbow. As in the case where the current color is white, the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

  First, the fact that the type of selectable promotion lottery color changes according to the current setting value will be described. When the current setting value is the setting 1 or the setting 2, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from either no promotion or yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can also be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting 4 or setting 5, red can be selected together with green, and if setting 6, All types can be selected. Therefore, when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light-emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player has the setting of 3 or more, when the color is red, the setting is 4 or more, and when the rainbow is the rainbow, the setting is 4 or more. 6 can be estimated.

  Next, a description will be given of how the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected by lottery changes according to the current setting value.

  When the current set value is set to 1, the selectivity of no promotion (continue in blue) as the promotion lottery color is 95%, and the selectivity of yellow is 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of the setting 2 or the setting 3, 75% in the case of the setting 4, and the like. The selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. It is set as follows. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or to decrease every time the current setting value increases by one. As described above, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continued in blue) as the promotion lottery color, so that the player is in a state where the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is in the game, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a low setting table.

  On the other hand, the selectivity of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 20% for setting 2, 15% for setting 3 or setting 4, and 5% for setting 5 or setting 6. In this case, it is set to 20%. Here, the selectivity of yellow as the promotion lottery color is higher in the case of setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, than in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%). ing. However, in the case of setting 3, the selectivity with promotion is the sum of the yellow selectivity (15%) and the green selectivity (20%), and is equivalent to the selectivity with promotion in setting 2. Becomes Further, compared to the case of the setting 2, in the case of the setting 3, there is a possibility that it is promoted to be green at a stretch of two steps, and in the case of the setting 4, there is a possibility that it is promoted to be red by being promoted by three steps. In the case of the setting 5, there is a possibility that the promotion lottery color is promoted at a stretch to red in three steps, and in the case of the setting 6, there is a possibility that the promotion lottery color is promoted to the rainbow four steps. Therefore, the player can easily estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a high-setting table by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

  In addition, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is green or later is the same as the case where the current color is blue. Can be determined. According to such an aspect, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light-emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, thereby setting the gaming machine 10 during the game to a high setting. It is easy to presume that there is a high possibility of being the platform.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting processing has been described, but the demoting lottery may be performed. By performing the demoting lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

  Further, in the case where the relegation lottery is performed, for example, after the promotion to the rainbow, the relegation lottery may not be performed. By not performing the relegation lottery after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continuously obtain a sense of accomplishment that the setting suggestion effect of the high setting (setting 6) has been reached, and improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

  Further, in the promotion lottery, multi-stage promotion was possible, but in the relegation lottery, the color may be demoted to lower colors one by one. As described above, by avoiding the mode of being demoted in multiple stages in the demoting lottery, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from dropping to a low setting at a stretch and discouraging the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the selectivity of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode of FIG. 58 and can be appropriately changed, similarly to the initial color selectivity described with reference to FIG. For example, the selectivity of the rainbow in the setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, as the current color becomes a higher color, the selectivity of a higher color may be made higher. Specifically, for example, in the case of setting 6, the rainbow selection rate is set to 10% when the current color is green, and the rainbow selection rate is set to 35% when the current color is red. , The selectivity of the upper color can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
The manner in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit command process (FIG. 45) described above is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an ending effect setting process according to a modification of the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). When the command is not a normal command (result of B4201 is “N”), the ending effect setting process ends. If the command is a normal command (result of B4201 is “Y”), the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4202).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4203). When the number of big hits has reached the predetermined number (result of B4203 is “Y”), effect control device 300 selects a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4204). The ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker are set according to the set values (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number may be a natural number, and may be set for each specific multiple, odd number, or integer number, or set to be a specific number sequence.

  On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (result of B4203 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets ending display and ending sound according to the set values (B4205). After that, when the processing of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting processing.

  The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending production setting process at the time of the start of the big hit is determined in the fanfare production setting process described above with reference to FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when receiving out-ball count]
Further, when receiving the number of out-balls, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the out-ball-number reception process (B1320 in FIG. 39) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received number-of-out-balls command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4301 is "N"), the process for receiving the number of out-balls ends. If the command is normal (result of B4301 is “Y”), the number of out-balls is stored in the RAM or the like of effect control device 300 (B4302). The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out-balls has reached a predetermined number (B4303). When the number of out balls is a predetermined number (result of B4303 is “Y”), effect control device 300 selects a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4304). ). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, for each multiple of a specific number (for example, for every 1000 balls, that is, 1000, 2000, 3000,...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promoted lottery color) by lottery (B4304) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of out-balls has not reached the predetermined number (result of B4303 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends the processing at the time of receiving out-balls.

[RTC reading process]
Further, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the RTC reading process (B0009) according to the fourth embodiment.

  Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received signal from RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). If the signal is not a normal signal (result of B4401 is “N”), the RTC reading process ends. When the signal is a normal signal (result of B4401 is “Y”), effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). The information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 serving as a timer.

  Then, effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the start of the game (or power-on) (B4403), and determines whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). If the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time (result of B4404 is “Y”), effect control device 300 selects a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4405). . The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00,...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promoted lottery color) by lottery (B4405) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting processing]
Further, at the time of the count information setting process (B1322) in the single command processing (FIG. 39), the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4501 is “N”), the count information setting process ends. When the command is a normal command (result of B4501 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not a jackpot operation is being performed (B4502). If the jackpot operation is not being performed (the result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process ends.

  When the jackpot operation is being performed (result of B4502 is “Y”), effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). The number of award balls in the special winning opening is added to the number of obtained payouts (B4504), and update setting of the obtained payout number display and the count display (display of the count number) is performed (B4505). Here, the count number and the number of acquired payouts are the number of counts and the number of acquired payouts during the consecutive play (ren chan) from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal gaming state. The number of acquired payouts may be used, or the total count number and the number of acquired payouts after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of acquired balls has reached a predetermined number (B4506). When the number of acquired payouts is a predetermined number (result of B4506 is "Y"), effect control device 300 promotes the light emission mode (color) of special winning opening LED 39d according to the received set value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (for example, every 5000 balls, that is, 5000, 10000, 15000,...). The selectivity of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. Next, as shown in FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64, display settings according to the set value are set for the acquired payout number display and the count display (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the acquired number of payouts display and the count display are randomly selected at a selection rate according to the set value.

  On the other hand, when the number of acquired payouts is not the predetermined number (result of B4506 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

  In the count information setting process, when a jackpot operation is being performed (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the number of winning balls of the special winning opening is added to the number of obtained payouts (B4504), and the special winning opening LED 39d is set. The light emission mode (color) was promoted by lottery (B4507). However, during the normal gaming state, the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is added to the obtained number of winnings in the number of winnings, thereby starting the winning. A light emitting unit (LED) provided in the mouth 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may emit light according to the set value.

  Here, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, of setting the update setting of the acquired payout number display and the count display to the display setting according to the set value. FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram illustrating another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the acquired payout number reaches a predetermined number, the display form of the acquired payout number display, the count display, and the display of other information are randomly selected at a selection rate according to the set value. To set the display.

  When the number of acquired payouts has not reached the predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “N”), the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

  In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 that displays the current number of jackpot rounds is displayed in, for example, “1” R and numerical notation (Arabic numerals (“1, 2, 3,...”)). In addition, a right-handed instruction notification 691 that is an instruction to perform a right-handed operation is displayed at the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, at the left end of the display screen, for example, the big hit stop symbol “7, 7, 7” (stop result, stop symbol) of the special fluctuation display game immediately before the big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode) is obtained, for example. "7" is displayed in numerical notation (Arabic numerals). Then, in the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying an effect point is displayed in, for example, “0030” pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the middle right corner of the display screen, an acquired payout number display 681 and a count display 682 are displayed in numerical notation (Arabic numerals) such as "4910" and "150".

  Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round when the number of acquired payouts is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “Y”) is, for example, as shown in FIG. 63B.

  Here, for example, as the setting value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the current big hit round number display 676 (“I” R) and the effect point display 678 (“Thirty” pt) are written in Chinese characters ( It will be easier to display in kanji ("Ichi, Ni, San ..."). In addition, the current number of acquired balls 681 ("5000" cars) and the count display 682 ("1507") are displayed in kanji notation (kanji ("1, 2, 2, ...")). It will be easier.

  FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of acquired balls 681, the count display 682, and the display of other information (the big hit round number display 676, the effect point display, and the like) in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a table of FIG. FIG. 64A is a table showing that the selectivity (allocation ratio) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the set value, and FIG. 64B shows the set value. It is a table which shows that a color selectivity changes according to it.

  For example, in the case of the setting 1, the selectivity of the numerical notation is 45%, and the selectivity of the kanji notation is 55%. On the other hand, in the case of the setting 6, the selectivity of the numerical notation is as high as 75%, and the selectivity of the kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is being performed, the player can estimate the setting value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in numerical notation or kanji notation.

  In the case of numerical notation, the display screen is the same as when the number of acquired payouts is not the predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number, a jackpot stop symbol 677 may be displayed in kanji notation (“seven (or lacquer)”) according to the set value, such as “setting suggestion effect occurred!” May be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Further, the selection rate may be set so as to be displayed in another notation format (for example, Roman numerals (“I, II, III...”)) In addition to the numerical notation and the Chinese character notation.

  In addition, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined by changing the selection rate of the numerical notation and the kanji notation, and changing the selection rate of the displayed color according to the setting value as shown in FIG. May be.

  For example, in the case of the setting 1, the black selectivity is 35% and the blue selectivity is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selectivity for black is as high as 70%, and the selectivity for blue is as low as 20%. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is being performed, the player can estimate the set value by checking what color is displayed on the display screen.

  When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the red selectivity is 20%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is being performed, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by checking whether the display on the display screen is red.

  As described above, by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen. Note that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to the numerical notation and the like and the color, but may be changed by changing the size and font of the character. In addition, a predetermined symbol or graphic corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification of light emission mode change (promotion, etc.)]
The light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emitting mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variable display game. In this case, regarding the relationship between the big hits and the expectation, if the big hit is not a big hit (the expectation is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value does not change as it is or the light emission corresponding to the set value A mode in which the mode (initial color) changes to a light emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of the effect may be adopted. In addition, after the end of the special figure change display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Further, in the case where the hit is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit is easily promoted at a low set value so as to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table such as 58 are reversed (for example, the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed), May be interested.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponding to the set value does not change and the light emission mode corresponding to the set value changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the expected degree of production. May be changed. After the end of the special figure change display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may return from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, during the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the special figure change display game), the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure change display game becomes a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggestion effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of the effect (expectation notification effect for notifying the degree of expectation).

  Therefore, when the expectation degree of the big hit is high, if the expectation degree of the big hit is changed by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notification effect, the game can be excited and the interest of the game is improved. Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, changing from the degree-of-expectation information production to the setting suggestion production can give the player an expectation, improving the interest in the game and improving the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

  Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit is made difficult to be promoted at a high set value so as to make it easier to watch the effect on the display device 41. In a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table of FIG. 58 and the like are reversed (for example, the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed). Alternatively, the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the time of the high setting may not be of interest to the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value. As a result, the effect with a high degree of expectation on the display device 41 and the light emission mode with a low degree of expectation of the predetermined light-emitting unit can encourage the player to have a good balance of excitement without excessively excitement. Since the effect on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, the effect is surprising, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in other cases (when the player watches the display device 41 at the time of a hit notification or the start of a big hit, for example), the predetermined light emitting unit is temporarily set to the light emitting mode based on the effect, and the display device 41 is not watched. By returning to the state (situation), the light emission mode may be returned to the light emission mode based on the set value. Further, even when an effect that is watched on the display device 41 is being performed, a light emission mode of a ratio based on the set value may be used regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emission mode (color) having a low degree of expectation may be once changed to the light emission mode based on the effect.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
Next, details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a hall / player setting mode process according to the fourth embodiment, which is executed by the effect control device 300.

  The hall / player setting mode process activates a hall setting mode in which a manager of a hall (game store) or the like can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. Can be done.

  Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B4601). When a later-described hall setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is being performed (result of B4601 is “Y”), the processing of B4606-B4616 is performed, and the director of the hall (gaming store) or the like operates the production button 25 (production button switch 25a, touch panel 25b). Various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation.

  When not in the hall setting mode (result of B4601 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the game is in the player setting mode (B4602). When a later-described player setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the game is in the player setting mode. When the game is in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “Y”), processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When not in the player setting mode (result of B4602 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for the customer, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. Note that “waiting for a customer” is, for example, a state in which an image for waiting for a customer (customer waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is “N”), the processing of B4617 is executed.

  If the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4603 is “Y”), effect controller 300 draws a screen (draws a hole setting screen) on display device 41 in the hall setting mode. Start setting is performed (B4604). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B4605).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (B4606), the frame decoration device 18 and the board. A hall LED adjustment process (B4607) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) and emission color of the LED of the decoration device 46, a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (such as a liquid crystal display) of the display device 41, and A power saving setting process (B4609) for setting power is executed. Next, effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process of setting the emission color of the logo combination or the like (B4610).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B4611). When an operation signal due to the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that there is a setting confirmation operation input. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  Then, when there is a setting confirming operation input (result of B4611 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the settings have been confirmed with the factory settings (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not determined by the factory settings (result of B4612 is “N”), the process proceeds to B4614. If it is determined by the factory default setting (result of B4612 is "Y"), a factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B4613). The factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613 are written in a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B4614).

  Next, effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for terminating screen drawing on display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B4615). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is cleared (B4616).

  When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B4603 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617). When waiting for a customer, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition has been satisfied. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4617 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  If the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, a flag during the player setting mode is set (B4619).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620), and performs the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process of customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process ends. When a setting confirmation operation input is made (result of B4623 is “Y”), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B4624). Then, the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (B4625). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and luminance determined in B4620-B4622 may not be written to the backup memory because it may disappear.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hall setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4603 is "Y"), effect controller 300 starts screen drawing in the hall setting mode (B4604), and as shown in FIG. A setting window 711, an emission color setting window 712, and a luminance setting window 713 are displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment process (B4606), and the brightness setting window 713 is a display used for the hall LED adjustment process (B4607) and the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608). The emission color setting window 712 is a display used for the hall LED adjustment process (B4607), and the setting suggestion effect performed in accordance with the lottery table by the predetermined light emitting unit as described above is the hole emission color selected in the hall setting. This is a display for switching to. As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the luminance setting window 713 are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 (including the operation of the touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall or the like. .

  By selecting any color as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed on a predetermined light emitting unit. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or a rainbow (a specific emission color) that indicates that the setting is high, it is possible to make it appear that the high setting stands are lined up abundantly in an event or the like. it can. As described above, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment processing are used as a second setting unit that cannot set the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit by the player and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall. Function. During the hall setting mode, the display related to the game, such as the decoration special symbol (identification information), the hold display section 630, the hold display 633, the hold digestion area 640, and the special figure changing hold display 643 may be hidden. . Since the hole setting mode is not performed during the game, by eliminating unnecessary ones, it is possible to make the display related to the hole setting mode easier to see and to reduce the processing load. When the display related to the game is not displayed, only the decoration reduced symbol (small symbol) 616 may be displayed.

  In addition, the setting suggestion effect is such that the hall emission color is displayed with priority over the one performed according to the lottery table, but it is displayed preferentially only when waiting for a customer, and during the actual game Can give priority to the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hole emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 during the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B is a diagram illustrating another example of the display screen of the display device 41 when in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4617 is “Y”), effect controller 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen In addition, a light emission setting window 714 is displayed together with the volume setting window 711 and the brightness setting window 713. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the luminance setting window 713, and the light emission setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B4621). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 is a display used in the player volume adjustment process (B4620), and the brightness setting window 713 and the light emission setting window 714 are displays used in the player LED adjustment process (B4621). is there.

  The light emission / non-emission setting window 714 allows the user to select whether or not to emit light of a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting unit is not performed. it can. As described above, the light emission setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment process function as first setting means that allows the player to set the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. During the game, since the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIGS. 55 to 62), unlike the hole setting mode, the player setting mode The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

  In the player setting mode, only the presence or absence of light emission of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. However, the effect of the effect device including the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit and the like is determined according to the set value. Whether display can be performed in a range may be settable, or the effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device may be set by the light emission color setting window 712 as in the hall setting mode. The effect mode of the effect device is an effect mode performed by control depending on the set value of the effect control device 300 (FIGS. 44, 55 to 62). The operation mode of the external accessory 95a, the effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like are shown. In addition, the effect mode of the effect device is set by the player in what range can be displayed, or whether or not a setting suggestive effect depending on the set value is performed in the player setting mode or the like. It may be possible to confirm.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when a fraud is detected by the magnet improper monitoring process (A1315) or the radio wave improper monitoring process (A1316). May be reset and displayed in a default color (for example, white).

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Also, at the time of the customer waiting demonstration setting process (B1308) in the one-shot system command process (FIG. 39), the setting was not made in the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect, but in the hall setting mode (light emission color setting window 712 and hall LED adjustment process). A predetermined light emitting unit is caused to emit light in the hole emission color. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a customer waiting demonstration setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4701 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration setting process ends. When the command is a normal command (result of B4701 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode of the hole setting (hole emission color) set in the hole setting mode. Is set (B4702). Then, a customer waiting demonstration start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demonstration setting process ends.

  As described above, the light emission mode (hole emission color) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting (during the customer waiting demonstration). Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) in a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it appear that there are abundant high setting stands in an event or the like. it can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to play and check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect. 10 could be improved.

  When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used during waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting demonstration). Other configurations are also possible.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is controlled depending on the set value is mainly described as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit). (Brightness), turning on or off, or blinking. In the case of blinking, the blinking cycle is also included. Further, if the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and an effect control unit (effect controller 300) for controlling the effect device. The gaming machine 10 includes a setting change unit (setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102)) that can change a setting value according to a setting related to the game. The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game only from the state of the gaming machine 10, and to appropriately suggest the setting value. Since the game can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be estimated by the player only from the gaming machine 10 in this manner, a setting suggestion tag (for example, suggesting the setting 4) that implies a setting value around the gaming machine 10 in the hall business. It is not necessary to install a shark tag, a shrimp tag indicating setting 5, and an angler tag indicating setting 6, which makes it possible to secure a wide space around the gaming machine 10 and improve the appearance thereof, and to improve the appearance of the hall. The burden can be reduced.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission / absence setting window 714, player LED adjustment) capable of setting by the player the effect mode of the effect device. Processing), and second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) in which the setting of the effect mode of the effect device cannot be set by the player. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means. According to such a gaming machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like uses the second setting device or the like to set the production suggestion production using the production device as a production configuration that suggests that the setting is high (for example, red). By setting the emission colors of the game machine 10 and the rainbow, etc., the appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be made as desired, and it is possible to make it appear as if there are plenty of high setting stands in an event or the like. Can be improved. In addition, for the player, it is possible to set an effect mode that suits the taste of the player, so that the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode taking into account the needs for both the setting on the hall side and the setting on the player side.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, during the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation are set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure change display game) is a special result. It is possible to switch between the expected degree notification production that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the degree of expectation of a special result is high, by changing the setting suggestive effect to the expectation notification effect and notifying the degree of expectation of the special result, the game can be excited and the interest of the game can be improved. Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, changing from the degree-of-expectation information production to the setting suggestion production can give the player an expectation, improving the interest in the game and improving the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as the embodiments from the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment.

[Example of screen transition when the start memory of the reserved digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and the entire game screen when the special figure changing display 643 of the reservation digestion area 640 changes to a change. It is an example of a transition. Note that the lottery of the hold change (holding change during digestion) of the special figure fluctuating hold display 643 may be performed, for example, in the advance lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the fluctuating effect setting process (FIG. 44).

  FIG. 68A shows a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variation display game is started.

  A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided at the center of the display screen of display device 41, and decorative first symbol A is provided in left area 610A and right area 610B is provided in right area 610B. The first decorative symbol B is displayed in an enlarged manner in the middle area 610C, and the first decorative symbol C is displayed in the middle area 610C, and is stopped and displayed at the symbol "2, 4, 5".

  In the center lower part of the display screen, a reserved storage area 640 (specific display unit, pending display area during change) and a reserved display unit 630 are displayed as a start storage display area. The reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display section 630 are displayed on the front side (upper layer) prior to the variable display in the variable display area 610. Such priority display setting may be performed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B0015).

  In the reserved digesting area 640, a special figure varying display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digesting pending display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special figure varying display game is displayed. Further, in the reserved digestion area 640, on the back (lower layer) of the special figure change pending display 643, a start storage display background 640A as a pedestal of the special figure change pending display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state. . In FIGS. 68 to 69B, the coarse hatching of the start storage display background 640A indicates that the start storage display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

  Here, the low image quality state (first display mode) is a state in which improvement in power saving performance and reduction in graphic processing load are prioritized over improvement in visibility to a player, and, for example, are more pixel than normal display states. If the number is reduced (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps, or when it can be adjusted from -100 to +100) Display at less than ± 0), low resolution (eg, display at a resolution of less than 720p (1280 × 720)), low frame rate per second (fps) (eg, less than 30 fps) Or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, the image of the original high-quality start storage display background 640A is subjected to the low image quality processing in the gaming machine 10 by the processing of the VDP 312 or the like, so that the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed instead of the high image quality. A low-quality start storage display background 640A can be displayed. Further, for example, both the low-quality image and the high-quality (or normal-quality) image of the start storage display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low-quality image and the high-quality image are replaced according to the situation. By using this, the start storage display background 640A is displayed with low image quality (or high image quality).

  A background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the start storage display background 640A is arranged above the start storage display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed in, for example, two bilobal display modes arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low image quality state like the start storage display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed in the same priority order (the same layer) as the start storage display background 640A, that is, in an integrated manner. The start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B may be displayed and set, for example, in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44). Further, the background object 640B may be displayed prior to the front (upper layer) of the start storage display background 640A. In addition, conversely, the start storage display background 640A may be preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

  On the hold display unit 630, up to four hold displays 633 (start memory display, special figure hold display) corresponding to the unstarted start memory are displayed. In FIG. 68A, the hold display 633 is the hold display unit. At 630, three are displayed. The hold display 633 is arranged so as to overlap a part of the start storage display background 640A, and is displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A. In this way, the effect control device 300 functions as a start storage display control unit that performs control of displaying the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and displaying the special figure change holding display 643 in the hold digestion area 640. The effect control device 300 executes the display setting of the hold display 633 and the special figure change holding display 643 in, for example, step B2015 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the time of the hold shift, and at the time of hold occurrence, the single-shot system command. The processing may be executed in the special figure 1 hold information setting processing (B1310) or the special figure 2 hold information setting processing (B1312).

  FIG. 68 (i) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure change display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure change pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 of the display screen, decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal fluctuation mode. In addition, in the following drawings, when the decoration first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the normal variation mode, the decoration first symbols A to C which are variably displayed are indicated by “↓”.

  FIG. 68 (U) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when a change is made to a hold due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a change during a hold or a preliminary look-ahead notice) during the execution of the special figure change display game. Here, the special figure change pending display 643 changes on hold, but the hold display 633 may change on hold as a prefetch notice effect. In the case of the digestion pending change, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (U), the special figure variation pending display 643 indicates that the degree of expectation is high from the normal round display mode by the pending change. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

  The display of the start storage display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state at the same time as the hold change. 68 to 69B, the fine hatching of the start storage display background 640A indicates that the start storage display background 640A is displayed in a high quality state. Like the start storage display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high quality state (second display mode). The background object 640 </ b> B changes from a normal foliate display mode to a floral display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that the image quality and the display mode of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are changed at the same timing as the change of the hold of the special figure change display 643 selected as a notice (change of the hold during digestion). For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44).

  Here, the state of high image quality (the second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the visibility for the player is prioritized over the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. When the number is increased (for example, displayed with 921,600 pixels or more), the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, or the like is increased (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, or when it can be adjusted from -100 to +100). Display at ± 0 or more; high resolution (for example, display at a resolution of 720p (1280 × 720) or more); high frame rate per second (fps) (for example, 30 fps or more) Or, an uncompressed image or an image with a small compression ratio is displayed.

  FIG. 68 (e) shows a display on the display device 41 when the running of the special figure variation display game is ended and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variation display area 610 becomes a loss result mode (loss stop symbol). Screen. "3, 7, 2" is stopped and displayed on the first decorations A to C of the variable display area 610 as a stop stop symbol. In addition, while the special figure change pending display 643 is digested and hidden, the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-shaped display mode to the bi-lobed display mode. The display setting of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B at the end of the special figure change display game is based on the symbol type (missing symbol or big hit symbol), for example, as a part of the one-shot command processing stop setting (B1331). You can do it. After that, the oldest start memory of the hold display 633 is moved to the special figure change display 643, and the next special figure change display game is started. Note that the timing at which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to the time when the special figure change pending display 643 is exhausted and becomes non-display, and may be a predetermined effect. May be terminated, the first decorative symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or the next special figure variable display game is started.

  FIG. 68 (O) shows a display in a case where the running of the special figure variable display game being completed and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes a big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode). 6 is a display screen of the device 41. “3, 3, 3” is stopped and displayed as the big hit stop symbol in the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, and the character “big hit !!” is displayed below the variable display area 610. . Further, while the special figure change pending display 643 is digested and hidden, the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B maintain a high quality state. The floral display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. After that, a big hit round game is started, and a big hit round effect is executed.

  Switching the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is limited to when the special figure change pending display 643 changes to a star display mode ((U) in FIG. 68). First, at the stage before that, that is, when starting the special figure fluctuation display game (immediately after (a) in FIG. 68) or immediately before the digestion pending change occurs ((i) in FIG. 68), high image quality is obtained. You may switch. Further, in the case of a step-by-step change or in a continuous effect (during a continuous notice effect or a pseudo continuous effect), the image quality of the start storage display background 640A may be switched stepwise. Further, for example, when the special figure change pending display 643 or the pending display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the start storage display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black, and the special figure changing The reservation display 643 and the reservation display 633 may be easily distinguished from each other. Further, the start memory is also stored when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, when the hold display reaches the upper limit of four and overflows, or when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, and so on. The display background 640A may be switched to high image quality to make it easier for the player to visually recognize. In addition, when the first decorative symbols A to C are stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific symbol (for example, when a change-on-hold symbol that indicates or confirms a hold change or when a chance eye stops) by executing the decorative special figure change display game. Alternatively, the start storage display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

  In addition, the first display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with low image quality, but is faintly visible but makes the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B inconspicuous. May be displayed. For example, as an aspect to make the start storage memory display background 640A and the background object 640B, another image is displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B (the front and upper layers) so as to cover the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B. it can. Other images in this case include, for example, an image or a mosaic image which is the same as the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B but is thin, a start storage display background 640A or a background (back, lower layer) or a background. A transparent image or the like with which the object 640B can be visually recognized can be used. The second display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and another image displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B is not displayed. You may display in an aspect.

[Screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of the display device 41 in a time series in the fifth embodiment, and is an example of a screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area 641. is there. In the following description of FIGS. 69A and 69B, description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

  (A) of FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

  On the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative first symbols A to C are stopped and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas 610 with symbols "2, 4, 5", and the special figure variation being executed is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. A special figure change pending display 643 corresponding to the display game is displayed. Also, in the reserved digestion area 640, a pedestal 640C of the special figure change pending display 643 and a low image quality start storage display background 640A are displayed on the back (lower layer) of the special figure change pending display 643. You. The pedestal 640C is displayed preferentially on the front surface (upper layer) of the start storage display background 640A. The start storage display background 640A has a smaller upper and left area than the start storage display background 640A of FIG.

  Further, at the lower left of the display screen of the display device 41, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variable display game is displayed. Character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed with low image quality. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is preferentially displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the variable display area 610, similarly to the reserved display area 640 and the reserved display section 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display section 630, and the display priority is the same. In addition, the character 641A is displayed preferentially on the front (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. Note that the character 641A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (the same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. In addition, the character 641A may be displayed preferentially on the front (upper layer) of the reserved digestion area 640 or the reserved display section 630, and conversely, the reserved digested area 640 or the reserved display section 630 may be preferentially displayed on the front of the character 641A. May be displayed. As described above, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

  FIG. 69A shows a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure change display game is executed in response to the special figure change pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner (“↓”) in a normal variation mode.

  Here, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed as another character (a different character from the high-quality character 641B described later) different from the character shown in FIG. Also, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed in a different form from that shown in FIG. For example, another mode of the low-quality character 641A may be a mode in which the character is sleeping with respect to the standing mode in FIG. 69A, or a mode in which walking is performed in FIG. 69A. On the other hand, a mode in which it is stationary may be used. Note that the character 641A is in a state of standing still before the decorative special figure change display game is started (() in FIG. 69A), and after the decorative special figure change display game is started (FIG. 69A). (G)) may be a mode in which the user is walking.

  FIG. 69A shows that the character 641A in the effect display area 641 becomes the character 641B when a predetermined condition (for example, a change during suspension, the occurrence of a pre-reading notice or a notice effect) is established during the execution of the special figure change display game. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when it changes. The character 641B is a girl who is pleased to eat onigiri that indicates that the degree of expectation is high, and is displayed in a high quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high quality state. Further, the start storage display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the reserved digestion area 640, and the effect display area 641 are also displayed in a high quality state. Further, the predetermined condition is, specifically, a case where the character 641A (641B) partially invades the start storage display background 640A and acts on the special figure change hold display 643 or the hold display, or the start storage display background 640A. This is a case in which a hold change effect is executed, which is displayed near the special figure change, and waits until it acts on the hold display 643 or the hold display 633 during special figure change. The timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the character 641A is switched to the high-quality character 641B is when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A or when the character 641A is displayed near the start storage display background 640A. it can. The character 641A may be switched to the high-quality character 641B when the character 641A acts on the special figure changing hold display 643 or the hold display, such as when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A or when the start storage display background is displayed. The character may be switched to the high-quality character 641B at the start of the next special figure variation display game when displayed near 640A.

  Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as another character (a different character from the low-quality character 641A described later) different from the character shown in FIG. Also, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a different form from that shown in FIG. For example, another mode of the high-quality character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (moving speed) is increased from (g) in FIG. 69A. In FIG. 69A, the low-quality character 641A may be kept stationary, and in FIG. 69A, the high-quality character 641B may walk.

  (K) of FIG. 69A shows the display of the display device 41 in the case where the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a stop symbol (“3, 7, 2”). Screen. While the special figure fluctuating hold display 643 is digested and hidden, the start storage display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a state of low image quality. The character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. Thereafter, the next special figure change display game is started by storing the start memory.

  FIG. 69 (ko) shows the display of the display device 41 when the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a big hit stop symbol ("3, 3, 3"). Screen. Characters “big hit !!” are displayed below the variable display area 610. Although the special figure change pending display 643 is digested and hidden, the start storage display background 640A, pedestal 640C, and effect display area 641 maintain a high quality state. In addition, the effect display of the girl who enjoys eating the rice ball of the character 641B is maintained as it is. After that, a big hit round game is started, and a big hit round effect is executed.

[Another example of screen transition when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 69B. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and shows the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the reserved digestion region 640 or the effect display region 641. 13 is another example of the screen transition.

  (Ku ') of FIG. 69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure change display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect or the like) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (ki) of FIG. 69A. is there. By the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B indicating that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a high quality state. On the other hand, the start storage display background 640A and the pedestal 640C of the reserved digestion area 640 maintain the display in a low image quality state. Thereafter, when the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 becomes a stop symbol (for example, “3, 7, 2”), the process proceeds to (K) of FIG. 69A, and the big hit stop symbol (for example, “3, 3, 3”) ), The process proceeds to FIG. 69A. When a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed with priority over the front (upper layer) than the reserved digestion area 640. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed on the foreground, and the effect of the character 641B can be emphasized. In addition, the notice effect is given by the player in accordance with the case where the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 reach or the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It can be generated when the effect button 25 is operated or the like.

  69 (B) in FIG. 69B is a display during the special figure change display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a change during suspension or a pre-reading notice) occurs in the reserved digestion area 640 from (G) in FIG. 69A. 6 is a display screen of the device 41. With the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the special figure change pending display 643 changes to a star-like display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high. The display of the pedestal 640C, the special figure change pending display 643, and the start storage display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the effect display area 641 and the character 641A maintain a low-quality display. It should be noted that the shape of the pedestal 640C is associated with the display mode of the special figure fluctuating hold display 643, such as a crescent shape, in response to the fact that the special figure fluctuating hold display 643 is changed to a star-shaped display mode. It may be changed to a certain shape. Thereafter, when the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 is a lost stop symbol (eg, “372”), the process proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and when the symbol is a big hit stop symbol (eg, “333”), FIG. Go to (no).

  Note that, when a predetermined effect occurs in the reserved digestion region 640, the reserved digestion region 640 may be preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) than the presentation display region 641. By doing so, for example, the reserved digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed at the forefront, and the change in the display mode of the special figure change pending display 643 or the pending display 633 can be emphasized.

  Further, when a predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the change in hold, the pedestal 640c also has high image quality like the special figure change display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be lower than that of the special figure changing display 643 (the image quality may be lower than that of the special figure changing display 643). As described above, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively lower than the image quality of the special figure fluctuating display 643, the player can easily watch the special figure fluctuating display 643, which is a main part of the effect, It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of the user.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the pending change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is displayed from the special figure fluctuating pending display 643. (Higher image quality than the special figure change pending display 643). The special figure change pending display 643 is displayed on the high image quality base 640c with a relatively low image quality, so that unexpectedness occurs. On the contrary, the special figure change pending display 643 stands out, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, when the special figure change pending display 643 has high image quality, the pedestal 640c may maintain low image quality. The pedestal 640c only needs to have a function of decorating the special figure change display 643 and indicating that the special figure change display 643 is being held during digestion. That's because.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment performs a variable display game (a special figure variable display game) using a plurality of pieces of identification information (identification symbols, special decoration symbols, and first decoration symbols A to C) based on establishment of a start condition. The display device 41 capable of displaying is provided, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, special result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game on the display device 41 and a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory for executing the variable display game based on establishment of the start condition. Start memory display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (a hold display 643 during special figure change, a hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory. Prepare. The start memory display control means displays the start memory display background 640A in a first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back of the start memory display so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. The start storage display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode based on the first display mode.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when predetermined conditions are satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start storage display changes, the start storage display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality). In this case, the start storage display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, there is a problem that the special figure change pending display 643 may be seen mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C and the like, but it is necessary to make the start memory display visible to the player. In such a case, it is possible to easily display the image and to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and to reduce the processing load for graphics and the like when the player does not need to visually recognize the image relatively (for example, when the degree of expectation is low). it can. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the visibility to the player and improvement in the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduction of the processing load, and improve the display method of the start storage display area in the gaming machine. be able to. Further, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start storage display, the identification information (decoration first symbols A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively noticeable is smaller than the start storage display. Since the image is displayed with high image quality, the player can easily recognize the identification information. In addition, since the start storage display background 640A is displayed with low image quality in other cases, the player can be prevented from misunderstanding that there is important information in the start storage display area, and the image of the display screen is displayed on the liquid crystal. Can be prevented from burning.

  The amusement machine 10 is an effect control means (executable) capable of executing a control for displaying an effect related to the variable display game in an effect display area 641 displayed on the display device 41 in preference to the variable display game (the special figure variable display game). Effect control device 300). The effect control means displays the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and can switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there was a problem that the effect display area 641 could be seen mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C and the like, but the start memory display (the special figure change pending display 643, Not only the hold display 633) but also the effect display area 641 can be displayed so that the player can easily recognize it when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above-described effect can be obtained.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays, on the display device 41, an effect game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the variable display game (variable display game on the collective display device 50) based on the establishment of the starting condition. Executable effect game means (effect control device 300), a specific display area (effect display area 641) displayed on display device 41 prior to an effect game (decorative special figure change display game), and the specific display Display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display control of specific characters (characters 641A and 641B) displayed in the area. The display control means (effect control device 300) displays the specific display area in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the normal state, and displays the specific character in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). Based on the establishment, the specific display area can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode, and the specific character can be switched to a second effect mode (for example, high image quality).

  Therefore, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the specific character, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). ), The power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 can be improved, and the processing load of the display control means (effect control device 300) such as graphics can be reduced. Conversely, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and Then, the specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player visually recognizes the specific display area (effect display area 641) and the specific characters (characters 641A and 641B). Easy.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. This embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial settings. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the timer interrupt process according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) is initialized after the state display edit output processing (A1318). The feature is that an LED driver initial setting process (A15001) to be set is added. After the initial setting of the LED driver 153, an LED data transmission process (A16001) for setting the output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, the display mode of the status display device 152, is performed. In the present embodiment, after describing the configuration of the LED driver 153, an initialization process of the LED driver 153 and an LED data transmission process will be described.

  Note that the order of the LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16001) may be interchanged. In this case, in the LED driver initial setting process (A15001), the LED driver 153 is initialized for the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that the LED driver 153 of the present embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, a collective driver 153a, a duty ratio driver 153b, and a payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c, which will be described later, are the same as the LED driver 153.

  The LED driver 153 displays the digits 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1), 900-1) of the digits sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method). 0 (digit 0)) to turn on the LED. The digit indicator 900 constituting the status display device 152 includes a seven-segment type (or an eight-segment type) as well as a combination of eight point-like LED lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either an anode common or a cathode common.

  When the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c, the LED driver 153 at the preceding stage (the batch driver 153a at the first stage or the second stage driver 153a) is indicated by a dotted line. A 16-bit command is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the winning ratio driver 153b). When the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, a 16-bit command is transmitted directly from the gaming microcomputer 111 without passing through the LED driver 153 at the preceding stage.

  The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163, a 16-bit latch circuit 164, a latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuits: for digits 0, 1, 2, and 3) 167a to 167d, and a control unit 173. , An oscillator 174, a 4-to-1 data selector 183, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment driver 193, and a digit driver 195. The control unit 173 includes a digit number setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, and a standby mode setting unit 178. The oscillation unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (particularly, the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Further, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

  The 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be output from the data output terminal to another LED driver 153 as it is. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is held (set) by the 16-bit latch circuit 164 at the timing (latch timing) at which the 16-bit latch circuit 164 receives the latch signal (load signal) from the game microcomputer 111. ).

  Among the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. Also, data of lower 8 bits (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) are possible) are also sent to the digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176, data selection unit 177, and standby mode setting unit 178.

  When the upper 8 bits (address section) indicate the address (for example, 21H (hexadecimal notation)) of the digit number setting section 175, the digit number setting section 175 sets the control data (initial value) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. Of the setting data, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are allowed) are taken in, and the corresponding digit number (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal notation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The set number of digits is the number (number of digits) of the display devices 900 driven by the LED driver 153, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal notation)), the duty setting unit 176 sets the control data (initial setting data) of the The lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in, and the corresponding duty ratio (for example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal notation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). Note that the duty ratio indicating the brightness (light emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900 corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit driver 195 in the case of the anode common, and corresponds to the segment driver 193 in the case of the cathode common.

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selector 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)), the data selector 177 outputs the lower 8 bits (necessary) of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. And the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may have the same address, and the setting of use / non-use of the decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( The data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

  That is, the data selection unit 177 selects whether the data of the 8-bit latch is decoded by the character generator 185 and used as decoded data, or whether the data of the 8-bit latch is used as it is as non-decoded data. When decoded, the data of the 8-bit latch is regarded as a character code and is decoded into lighting pattern data of a character. When the data of the 8-bit latch is used as non-decoded data as it is, the data selection unit 177 sends a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data to the two-to-one data selector 187. As described above, the data selection unit 177 can set whether or not to use the decoding function based on a command (including a command and control data) from the game control device 100 (the game microcomputer 111).

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal notation: X is arbitrary)), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are fetched. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to the segment driving unit 193 or the digit driving unit 195 to turn off the LED driver 153 and shifts the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H). 193 and the digit driver 195 are forcibly turned off to turn off the indicators 900 of all digits (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), or the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 of the LED driver 153 are dynamically driven. Or normal operation (1XH). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared, and the immediately preceding setting is retained. In the normal operation, after the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 are driven once, the data is stored in the 8-bit latch, and the data of the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected on the display of the display 900. You.

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal notation)), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. Thus, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and captures (sets) the lighting pattern data or the character code of the lower 8 bits (data section). Similarly, when the upper 8 bits indicate any address (for example, 23H, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal notation)) of the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d, the latch selector 165 sets the 8-bit latch 167b- 167d to transfer the latch signal. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d can latch and capture the lighting pattern data or the character code of the lower 8 bits (data portion) addressed to itself.

  Note that a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any one of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d, and One of the latches 167a to 167d is selected. Then, the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d can hold display data for the display 900 of the digit 0, the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 each addressed to itself.

  The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d corresponding to the digit lines of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method). I do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 outputs any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a to 167d to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on / off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of an anode common, an on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of a cathode common, a current draw voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) Is applied. Note that information indicating which digit line the digit driver 195 is selecting may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

  For example, when the digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal and selects a digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, when the digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit 1, digit 2, or digit 3 digit lines, the data of the 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, and 167d are respectively selected.

  Character generator 185 decodes data sent from 4-to-1 data selector 183. If the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 converts the character code (character code) into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code by decoding. Convert to

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding to the character code. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data for lighting a decimal point (Dp). Various character codes can be defined as to which characters are associated with each other. The character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines an association between a character code (input) and a character (output) (character lighting pattern data). And so on. For example, the character code “X0011010B” corresponds to the character “−”, and the lighting pattern data ((a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0) for lighting (turning on) only the segment g. , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0))) (for example, “00000010B”). In addition, since the collective driver 153a uses non-decoded data, when lighting (turning on) only the segment g, the lighting pattern data (for example, “00000010B”) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is used as it is. .

  Returning to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. 185 outputs lighting pattern data of a character (character) indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is already held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. The character generator 185 merely converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by decoding. If the appropriate lighting pattern data coincides with one of the character codes by accident, the character generator 185 of the collective driver 153a may output lighting pattern data of a character (character).

  The two-to-one data selector 187 outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the direct output from the four-to-one data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. One of the non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment driver 193. The non-decoded data is data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without passing through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, 2-to-1 data selector 187 outputs non-decoded data, and when no data selection signal is input, outputs decoded data.

  If the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 receives a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data, and always outputs the appropriate lighting pattern held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. The data is output to the segment driver 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the winning combination driver 153b or the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c, the two-to-one data selector 187 does not receive the data selection signal and always lights the character (character). The pattern data (decoded data) is output to the segment driver 193.

  The segment driver 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the two-to-one data selector 187 to the display 900 of the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit driver 195 ( Dynamic drive method). The lighting pattern data is on / off data of light emission of eight LEDs (segments ag, Dp or eight point-like LEDs) of the display 900 at the selected digit (ie, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment drive unit 193 turns on the LED (light emission state) by applying a current draw voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage. In the case of the cathode common, the LED is turned on (light emitting state) by applying an on voltage as a drive voltage to the segment line.

  The eight LEDs of the display 900 are the segments ag and Dp in the seven-segment display (eight-segment display including the point portion). On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34A, the eight LEDs of the indicator 900 are a set of eight point-like LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) or eight point-like LED lamps. (D9, D11-D16, D17).

  The digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select a digit line of each digit. The digit driver 195 applies an ON voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current pull-in voltage (OFF voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common, as a drive signal.

  By connecting one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND), the resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is connected to the segment drive section 193 and a constant current circuit composed of the segment drive section 193. The value of the current flowing through the line can be set. Thus, a common current value can be supplied to all the LEDs.

  Further, the emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the emission color of the LED (or segment). The emission color control unit receives a command (control data) related to the color (color) of the LED and sends a command signal to the segment driving unit 193 to control the emission color of the LED in the main processing and the timer interrupt processing. Can be. The segment driving unit 193 applies a driving voltage to the segment line of a color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control unit and drives the segment line. The segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display 900.

  As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment has been initialized in the main processing. At this time, initial setting is performed on the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, also in the timer interrupt processing, at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is initialized. Thus, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (drive unit) becomes an undefined value due to noise or the like after the main process, the drive data (LED command) is output after the correct set value is set in the timer interrupt process. It is possible to avoid turning off of the status display device 152 due to noise or the like. When the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt processing, the initialization (A1016) in the main processing is omitted. Can be. In the sixth embodiment, a case will be described as an example where initial settings are performed for the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176.

[Initial setting command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an initialization command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and a latch. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 sets an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit) is an initial setting value of the digit number) (16 bits) (FIG. 74). The initial setting command (du) (16 bits) (FIG. 74) including the initial setting data (du) ((du) is the initial setting value of the duty ratio) (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 is sequentially transmitted.

  The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time the initial setting command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the initial setting command. Thus, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). Is done. The next initialization signal (du) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal, and the initial setting data (du) is stored in the duty setting unit 176 by the initialization command (du). Is done. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting section 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting section 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the LED driver 153 is the combination driver 153b, and the character code (8 bits) stored in the combination driver 153b is the combination display data.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and generates a clock. The signal is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (du) as described above (A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver and the latch according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

  In the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, the first LED command (digit 0) is held by the first latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167a stores the character ratio display data (digit 0) by the LED command (digit 0). ) Is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal, and stores the character ratio display data (digit) in the 8-bit latch 167b by the LED command (digit 1). 1) is stored. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the third LED command (digit 2) by the third latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167c stores the character ratio display data (digit 2) by the LED command (digit 2). It is memorized. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the fourth LED command (digit 3) by the fourth latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167d stores the character ratio display data (digit 3) by the LED command (digit 3). It is memorized.

[LED data transmission processing]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the sixth embodiment. The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

  The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c (A16015), and transmits the LED command (digit 2) (A16017). ). The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d (A16021), and transmits the LED command (digit 3) (A16023). ). In FIG. 76, the LED command (character ratio display data = character code) is transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade Connection of LED Driver According to First Modification]
FIG. 77 shows details of the cascade connection of the LED driver 153 (the winning combination driver 153b and the payout ratio / discharged ball count driver 153c) according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the winning ratio driver 153b constitutes the first stage, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the winning ratio driver 153b, and is transmitted directly from the winning ratio driver 153b to the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. You. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character codes (character codes) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are sequentially transmitted to the winning ratio driver 153b and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. Is done. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. Note that the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the winning ratio driver 153b and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c.

(Status display device)
FIG. 78 (A) is a diagram showing the details of the accessory ratio display section 68 for displaying the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio display section 68 in the status display device 152 is formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type displays including a point portion) indicators 900 in the horizontal direction. , A digit 2 and a digit 3 are a four-digit seven-segment display 900. The accessory ratio display section 68 can switch and display the display of the entire accessory ratio (for example, “y50.8”) and the display of the continuous accessory ratio (for example, “r58.4”). Note that the digit 3 (the fourth digit from the right) is a character "y" indicating the total bonus ratio (commonly used bonus ratio) or a character "r" indicating the continuous bonus ratio. May be displayed.

  The duty ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. The lighting of the indicator 900 at each digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) of the accessory ratio display section 68 is controlled. The character code (principal item ratio display data) corresponds to the numerical value of each digit of the bonus item ratio (A1318 in FIGS. 6 and 70) calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100. The duty ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) for generating lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185. In this case, the setting is made to use the decoded data. In other words, the combination ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the combination ratio display section 68 from the character code.

  FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing details of a discharge ball number display section 66 for displaying the discharge ball number and a payout rate display section 67 for displaying the payout rate. The number-of-discharged-balls display section 66 and the payout rate display section 67 in the state display device 152 are formed by horizontally arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) indicators 900 in a horizontal direction. The indicator 900 indicating the digit 0 from the right and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the discharged ball count display unit 66, and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 2 and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 3 from the right indicate the payout rate. This corresponds to the section 67. Conversely, a display 900 indicating a digit 0 and a display 900 indicating a digit 1 from the right correspond to the payout rate display section 67, and a display 900 indicating a digit 2 and a display 900 indicating a digit 3 from the right. You may make it correspond to the ball number display part 66. The number-of-discharged-balls display section 66 and the payout rate display section 67 can be simultaneously displayed.

  The driver 153c for payout rate / number of ejected balls (FIG. 77) turns on the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the winning ratio driver 153b, and turns on the character (character) indicated by the character code. The data is converted into pattern data, and the lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the number-of-ejected-balls display section 66 and the payout rate display section 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The driver 153c for the ball-out rate / discharged ball count decodes the character code into character lighting pattern data (discharged ball count display data or ball-out rate display data) of the character indicated by the character code. ) And if the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the setting is made to use the decoded data. That is, the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball count can set whether or not to use the decoding function of generating the lighting data of the discharged ball count display section 66 and the discharge rate display section 67 from the character code.

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to First Modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart illustrating an initial setting command sent to the winning combination driver and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 79, the initial setting command is shown without the address portion (8 bits). The game microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c and initial setting data (8) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. Bit) in the order included in the initial setting command (32 bits), the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of discharged balls, and the driver 153b for the duty ratio driver 153b. The data is transmitted in the form of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits) in the order of the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time the initial setting command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning combination driver 153b by the latch signal.

  Then, in response to the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of driver for payout ratio / number of ejected balls and driver for duty ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an initial setting process of a winning combination driver and a payout ratio / discharged ball count driver according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets an initial setting command (digit) c (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the driver for payout rate / number of balls to be ejected 153c. (16 bits) (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) b (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b. 16 bits) (A15007), and transmits the initial setting commands (digits) c and b (32 bits) connected in the order of the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. And transmits it together with the clock signal (A15009).

  Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (du) c (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the payout rate / number of discharged balls driver 153 c. (A15011), and generates an initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b (A15012). The initial setting commands (du) c and b (32 bits) linked in the order of the setting command (du) c and the initial setting command (du) b are transmitted as described above (A15014).

[Transmission Timing Chart of LED Command According to First Modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing the LED commands sent to the winning combination driver and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the combination ratio driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data (digit 0 to digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c is a discharge code. This is ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or pitching rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). In FIG. 81, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 stores the ejection ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout ratio / ejection ball number driver 153c and the 8-bit latch 167a of the duty ratio driver 153b. These are generated and transmitted in the form of including them in the LED command (32 bits) in the order of the stored accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits), and then the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball count In the order of the discharge ball count display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b and the bonus ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver ratio driver 153b. It is generated and transmitted in the form included in the LED command (32 bits).

  Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number-of-discharged-balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharge ball count display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / ball discharge driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153b.

  Although not shown in FIG. 81, thereafter, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the pitching rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153c for the pitching rate / discharged ball count. ), And in the order of the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination driver 153b, these are generated and transmitted in the form of including them in the command (32 bits), and then the ball The throwing-out rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the rate / ejected number of balls driver 153c, and the accessory ratio display data (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the winning ratio driver 153b ( These are generated and transmitted in the order of digits 3) b in the form of including them in the command (32 bits).

  Therefore, the throwing rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the throwing rate / ejected ball count driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination driver 153b.

  Further, the throwing rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the throwing rate / ejected ball count driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the combination ratio driver 153b by the LED command (digit 3) b.

[LED Data Transmission Process According to First Modification]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The game microcomputer 111 firstly outputs the LED command (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / ball ejection number driver 153c. (A16002), and generates an LED command (digit 0) b including punctuation ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the ratio driver 153b (A16003). The LED commands (digit 0) c and b (32 bits) linked in the order of LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

  The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) c including the number-of-ejected-balls display data (digit 1) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / number-of-ejected-balls driver 153c (A16008). , An LED command (digit 1) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the duty ratio driver 153b (A16009), and an LED command (digit 1) c, LED The LED commands (digit 1) c and b linked in the order of the command (digit 1) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) c including the ball-out rate display data (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball-out rate / discharged ball count driver 153c (A16014). , Generates an LED command (digit 2) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the duty ratio driver 153b (A16015), and generates an LED command (digit 2) c, LED The LED commands (digit 2) c and b linked in the order of the command (digit 2) b are transmitted as described above (A16018).

  The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) c including the ball-out rate display data (digit 3) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ball-out rate / number-of-ejected-balls driver 153c (A16020). , Generates an LED command (digit 3) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver for ratio driver 153b (A16021), and generates an LED command (digit 3) c, LED The LED commands (digit 3) c and b linked in the order of the command (digit 3) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Gaming control device according to second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of a gaming machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, except that the status display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the collective display device 50. It has become. In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, a collective driver 153a, a winning combination driver 153b, and a payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c are cascade-connected in this order by data signal lines. Are connected to the collective driver 153a.

[Cascade Connection of LED Driver According to Second Modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating the details of the cascade connection of the LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the winning ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c constitutes the third stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and is transmitted from the collective driver 153a to the ratio driver 153b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the winning ratio driver 153b is directly transmitted from the winning ratio driver 153b to the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character codes (character codes) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are collected in order by a batch driver 153a, a duty ratio driver 153b, a payout rate / discharged ball count. Is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. Note that the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) to the collective driver 153a, the winning combination driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c in parallel.

  The collective driver 153a controls lighting of a collective display unit (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a includes a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display 900 (LED lamp) as the display unit 900 (LED lamp) of the first special figure change display unit 51 (D1). The special figure change display section 52 (D2) is controlled as the digit 1 display 900 (see FIG. 2B and the like).

  The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including the point portion) itself. The eight dotted LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the round display unit 60 and the first gaming state display unit 57 are regarded as the segments (ag, Dp) of the digit 2 display 900. (See FIG. 2B). The batch driver 153a includes a hold storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display unit 54, special figure 2 hold display unit 55, general figure hold display unit 56), a second game state display unit 58, and a third game state. The eight point-like LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D17) on the display unit 59 are controlled by regarding them as segments (ag, Dp) of the display unit 900 of the digit 3 (see FIG. 2B and the like).

  In the present embodiment, the collective driver 153a is actually the same type of LED driver 153 (same IC) as the winning ratio driver 153b and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. The setting 153a does not use the decoded data from the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185 (non-use setting).

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to Second Modification]
FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to the collective driver, the winning combination driver, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown without the address part (8 bits).

  The game microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / number of ejected balls driver 153c, and initial setting data (8) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. Bit) and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a in the form of being included in the command (48 bits) in order, and setting the duty of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of ejected balls. Initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b, and duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a. Is transmitted in the order of the initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) included in the command (48 bits).

  The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time the initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning combination driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) a is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

  Then, in response to the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) a is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of driver for payout rate / number of balls to be ejected, driver for duty ratio, driver for batch]
With reference to FIG. 86, an LED driver initial setting process according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a procedure of an initial setting process of a collective driver, a winning combination driver, and a driver for a payout ratio / discharged ball count according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets an initial setting command (digit) c (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the driver for payout rate / number of balls to be ejected 153c. (16 bits) (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) b (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b. (A15007), and an initial setting command (digit) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (digits) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a. ) Is generated (A15008), and the initial setting commands (digits) c, b, and a (48 bits) are connected in the order of the initial setting command (digit) c, the initial setting command (digit) b, and the initial setting command (digit) a. ) Is transmitted together with a clock signal written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit (A15010).

  Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (du) c (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the payout rate / number of discharged balls driver 153 c. (A15011), and generates an initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b (A15012). The initialization command (du) a (16 bits) including the initialization data (du) a related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153a is generated (A15013), and the initialization command (du) c and the initial Initial setting commands (du) c and b linked in order of setting command (du) b and initial setting command (du) a a transmitting (48 bits) similar to that described above in (A15015).

[Transmission Timing Chart of LED Command According to Second Modification]
FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the collective driver, the winning combination driver, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the combination ratio driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data (digit 0 to digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c is a discharge code. This is ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or pitching rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). The collective driver 153a stores lighting pattern data (digit 0 to digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as “lighting data”). In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown without the address portion (8 bits).

  The game microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c, and the character stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the duty ratio driver 153b. The codes (digit 0) b (8 bits) and the lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are sent in the order of LED commands (digit 0) c, b, a ( 48 bits), and the character code (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball count, Character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167b of driver 153b, stored in 8-bit latch 167b of batch driver 153a That lighting data (column 1) and these LED commands in the order of a (8 bits) (digit 1) c, b, and transmits the generated in a form included in a (48-bit).

  Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number-of-discharged-balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the lighting signal (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharge ball count display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / ball discharge driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the lighting signal (digit 1) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

  Although not shown in FIG. 87, the gaming microcomputer 111 thereafter stores the character code (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of discharged balls. These are the character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ratio driver 153b, and the lighting data (digit 2) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a. Is generated in the form of being included in the LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) and transmitted, and then the character code stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153c (Digit 3) c (8 bits), character code (digit 3) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167d of combination driver 153b, batch drive These LED commands (digit 3) c in the order of lighting data stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 153a (digit 3) a (8 bits), b, and transmits the generated in a form included in a (48-bit).

  Therefore, the payout rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the combination ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the lighting signal (digit 2) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

  Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the payout rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the combination driver 153b. At the same time, the lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED Data Transmission Process According to Second Modification]
With reference to FIG. 88, the LED driver transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 firstly outputs an LED command (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / ball ejection number driver 153c. (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the ratio driver 153b (A16003). An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of the special figure 1 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16004). An LED command (digit 0) c, LED command (digit 0) b, and an LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) linked in the order of LED command (digit 0) a are serial communication circuits. And transmits it together with the clock signal (A16007).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (digit 1) c (16) including the number-of-ejected-balls display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / number-of-ejected balls driver 153c. Bit) (A16008), and generates an LED command (digit 1) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the ratio driver 153b (A16009). An LED command (digit 1) a including the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of the special figure 2 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the driver 153a is generated (A16010). Then, the LED commands (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of the LED command (digit 1) c, the LED command (digit 1) b, and the LED command (digit 1) a are the same as described above. It transmits (A16013).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs the LED command (digit 2) c (16) including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver / ball output rate / discharged ball count driver 153c. (A16014), and generates an LED command (digit 2) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the combination driver 153b (A16015). Then, an LED command (digit 2) a including the lighting code (digit 2) a (display data of ordinary figure / round / first game state) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153a is generated (A16016). Then, the LED commands (digit 2) c, b, and a (48 bits) connected in the order of the LED command (digit 2) c, the LED command (digit 2) b, and the LED command (digit 2) a are the same as described above. It is transmitted (A16019).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs the LED command (digit 3) c (16) including the payout rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153c. (A16020), and generates an LED command (digit 3) b including the character ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the ratio driver 153b (A16021). An LED command (digit 3) a including a lighting code (digit 3) a (display data of the hold / second and third game states) stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver 153a is generated (A16022). Then, the LED commands (digit 3) c, b, and a (48 bits) connected in the order of the LED command (digit 3) c, the LED command (digit 3) b, and the LED command (digit 3) a are the same as described above. It is transmitted (A16025).

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (unchanged information (program) for game control), and a game control program (for game control). A light-emitting unit based on operation processing means (game microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined operation processing based on invariant information (program) and driving data (LED command) output from the operation processing means (game microcomputer 111). And a driving unit (LED driver 153) for driving (the accessory ratio display unit 68). The driving means (LED driver 153) is provided with a setting section (digit number setting section 175, duty setting section 176) for setting the light emission mode in the light emitting section (combination ratio display section 68). Arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) including a main process (A1001) for controlling the progress of the game, and an interrupt process (A1301) executed by interrupting the main process (A1001) at predetermined time intervals. In the interrupt processing (A1301), the driving unit (LED driver 153) transmits initial setting data for initial setting of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) (at least one of the plurality of setting units). After that, the drive data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153).

  As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an undefined value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the LED driver 153 can be returned to the normal state in the interrupt processing, and the correct setting value can be obtained. After that, the driving data (LED command) can be output, and it is possible to avoid turning off the light due to noise or the like of the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50).

  In the interrupt processing (A1301), after transmitting the driving data (LED command) to the driving unit (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) is used. A configuration is also possible in which initial setting data for initial setting is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153). In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt processing, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt processing to initialize the setting unit.

  That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving unit together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the collective display device) can be transmitted regardless of the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data. 50) It is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) can transmit the initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) also in the main processing (A1001). This makes it possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 even before the interruption process is started.

  According to the sixth embodiment, the setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) set the number of light emitting elements (displays 900) to emit light in the light emitting unit (combination ratio display unit 68). It includes a digit number setting section 175 and a duty setting section 176 for setting a duty ratio in the light emitting element (display 900).

  Thereby, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an undefined value due to noise or the like, after setting the correct set value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratios (light emission intensity, brightness)) It is possible to output driving data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

  According to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the accessory ratio display unit 68 for displaying the accessory ratio. Thereby, the accessory ratio display section 68 can be reliably displayed according to the game control program even after the main processing.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning area (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (2nd starting winning area)
39 Special fluctuation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board production device 44a, 44b Internal accessory (inside movable member)
46 Panel decoration device 50 Batch display device (LED)
80 Lamp display device 93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outer movable member)
102 Set value change switch 143 Probability set value display device 150 Driver 152 Status display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply device 630 hold display section 640 hold digestion area 640A start memory display background 641 effect display area

Claims (1)

A game control program storage means for storing a game control program,
Arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program;
Driving means for driving the light emitting section based on the driving data output by the arithmetic processing means,
The driving means includes:
A setting unit for setting a light emission mode in the light emitting unit is provided,
The game control program includes:
A main process for controlling the progress of the game,
Interrupt processing executed by interrupting the main processing every predetermined time,
The arithmetic processing means,
In the interrupt processing, after transmitting initial setting data for initial setting the setting unit to the driving unit, transmitting the driving data to the driving unit ,
The gaming machine , wherein the initial setting data includes information on a duty ratio for setting a light emission intensity of the light emitting unit and information on a digit number for setting a driving digit number of the light emitting unit .

Images